Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 91

Canadian

Standard
IEEE Standard
and
American National Standard
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
for
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS
(Including Reference Designation
Class Designation Letters)

Secretariat fol' American National Standards Committee Y.'12


The Institute of Electrical and Electronics En,e:inccrs
The American Societ\' of Mechanical Engineers

Approved November 17, 1970 by the


American National Standards Institute
SflrJ2JJ7

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
IEEE N o . 3 1 5
(ANSI Y32.2-1970
17 November 1970

ACCEPTANCE NOTICE

The following Industry Standardization Document was adopted on 15 September


1970 for mandator) use by the Department of Defense. The indicated industry group
has furnished the clearances required bv existing regulations. Copies of the document
are stocked b y D o D Single Stock Point, U.S. Naval Publications and Printing Service
Office, Naval Supply Depot, Philadelphia, Pa. 19111, for issue to Military Activities
only.

Title of D o c u m e n t : G r a p h i c S y m b o l s f o r Electrical a n d Electronics D i a g r a m s (including


Reference D e s i g n a t i o n Class D e s i g n a t i o n Letters)

Document N o . : (a) IEEE N o . 3 1 5


(b) A N S I Y32.2-1970

Date of Specific Issue Adopted: () 1 5 S e p t e m b e r 1 9 7 0


(b) 17November 1970

Releasing Industry Group: l a ) T h e Institute o f Electrical a n d Electronics E n g i n e e r s , Inc.


!b) A m e r i c a n N a t i o n a l S t a n d a r d s Institute, Inc.

Supersedes: U S A S Y 3 2 . 2 - 1 9 6 7

Custodians: Military Coordinating Activity:


Army - E L Navy - SH
Air Force - 26
Navy - SH

Review Interests:
Army - A T , A V , M E , MI, M U , W E
Navy - AS, OS, SH, Y D

User Interest: Project DRPR-0151


Navy - M C

Certain provisions of this standard are the subject of international standardization


agreement, A B C NAVY S T D 28A - Symbols and Abbreviations for Electrical and
Electronic Drawings, to which the U.S. Army also subscribes. When amendment,
revision, or cancellation of this standard is proposed which will effect or violate the inter
national agreement concerned, the preparing activity will take appropriate reconcilia
tion action through military international standardization channels including depart
mental standardization offices, if required.

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
ANSI lEE E

Y32.2 No. 315

1970 Mar. 1971

Revision of Y32.21967

IEEE Standard
and
American National Standard
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
for
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS DIAGRAMS
(Including Reference Designation
Class Designation Letters)

Secretariat for American National Standards Committee Y32


The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Approved as ANSI Standard by the


American National Standards Institute
November 17, 1970

NOTICE
The IEEE will maintain this standard current with the state of the technology. Comments on this standard as well
as suggestions for additional material that should be included are invited. These should be addressed to:
Secretary
IEEE Standards Committee
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
345 East 47 Street
New York, N. Y. 10017

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
American National Standard

A n A m e r i c a n National Standard implies a consensus of those substantially con


cerned with its scope and provisions. A n A m e r i c a n National Standard is intended
as a g u i d e to aid the manufacturer, the consumer, a n d the general public. T h e exis
tence of an A m e r i c a n National Standard does not in any respect p r e c l u d e anyone,
w h e t h e r he has a p p r o v e d the standard or not, from manufacturing, marketing,
purchasing, or using products, processes, or procedures not c o n f o r m i n g to the stan
dard. A m e r i c a n National Standards are subject to periodic r e v i e w and users are
cautioned to obtain the latest editions.

C A U T I O N N O T I C E : This A m e r i c a n National Standard m a y b e revised or with


d r a w n at a n y time. T h e procedures of the A m e r i c a n National Standards Institute
require that action b e taken to reaffirm, revise, or w i t h d r a w this standard n o later
than five years from the date of publication. Purchasers of A m e r i c a n National
Standards m a y receive current information on all standards b y calling or writing
t h e A m e r i c a n National Standards Institute.

T h e s y m b o l s appearing in this standard w e r e r e p r o d u c e d from original drawings


prepared for the M e r g e n t h a l e r D i a g r a m m e r .

T h e individual symbols contained in this standard m a y b e copied, reproduced,


or e m p l o y e d in any fashion without permission of the I E E E . A n y statement that
the s y m b o l s u s e d are in c o n f o r m a n c e with this standard shall b e on the user's o w n
responsibility.

Copyright 1971 b y the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. N o part of this
publication may be reproduced in any form, in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise, with
out the prior written permission of the publisher.

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
Foreword
(This Foreword is not a part of American National Standard Graphic Symbols for
Electrical and Electronics Diagrams, Y32.2-1970.)

This A m e r i c a n N a t i o n a l Standard is a revision a n d expansion of U S A Standard G r a p h i c S y m b o l s for


Electrical a n d Electronics D i a g r a m s , Y 3 2 . 2 - 1 9 6 7 .
A large n u m b e r of n e w symbols has b e e n a d d e d . W h i l e the major additions are in the areas of
antennas, transmission path, thermal relays, V H F / U H F / S H F circuit devices, and semiconductor de
vices, all sections h a v e s o m e n e w or revised items. N e w sections h a v e b e e n a d d e d to cover graphic
symbols for special-purpose m a i n t e n a n c e diagrams, analog c o m p u t e r s y m b o l s ( f o r m e r l y in I E E E Stan
dard 1 6 6 ) , also e q u i p m e n t a n d station symbols for system diagrams, m a p s a n d charts. F o r convenience
of users, the class letters u s e d to form reference designations ( f o r m e r l y in A N S I Y 3 2 . 1 6 ) h a v e n o w
b e e n i n c l u d e d in a n e w section of Y 3 2 . 2 . In this revision the symbols are slightly larger than in Y 3 2 . 2 -
1 9 6 7 edition, resulting in i m p r o v e d readability. A revised edition of the large s y m b o l chart included
with the Y 3 2 . 2 - 1 9 6 7 edition will b e available separately to c o m p l e m e n t the n e w edition.
A l l of the s y m b o l s are d e s i g n e d so that their connection points fall o n a m o d u l a r grid. This should
help those w h o use a grid basis for the preparation of diagrams. B y proper enlargement of the s y m b o l
the usual coordinate-grid sizes can b e m a t c h e d .
A substantial effort has been m a d e to h a v e this A m e r i c a n N a t i o n a l Standard m o r e c o m p a t i b l e with
a p p r o v e d International Electrotechnical C o m m i s s i o n ( I E C ) R e c o m m e n d a t i o n s ( I E C Publication 117,
in various p a r t s ) . Electrical diagrams are a factor in international trade; the use of one c o m m o n s y m b o l
l a n g u a g e ensures a clear presentation a n d economical diagram preparation for a variety of users.
M e m b e r s of the preparing c o m m i t t e e h a v e b e e n active in transmitting U S A viewpoints to the cognizant
I E C Technical Committee.
Alternative s y m b o l s are s h o w n o n l y in those cases w h e r e agreement o n a c o m m o n s y m b o l could not b e
attained at this time. It is h o p e d that the n u m b e r of alternative s y m b o l s will b e r e d u c e d in future
editions.
T h e s y m b o l s in this standard represent the b e s t consensus that can b e attained at this time. Stand
ardization, h o w e v e r , m u s t b e d y n a m i c , not static, and any solution of a p r o b l e m should b e tested
through use a n d revised if necessary. It is anticipated that the contents of this standard will b e modified
as future needs dictate; such modifications will b e m a d e available through the issuance of a p p r o v e d
supplements. Suggestions for i m p r o v e m e n t are w e l c o m e d . T h e y should b e addressed to:
Secretary, I E E E Standards C o m m i t t e e
Institute of Electrical a n d Electronics Engineers, Inc.
3 4 5 E a s t 4 7 Street
N e w York, N . Y . 1 0 0 1 7
This standard has b e e n prepared b y the Institute of Electrical a n d Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
Standards C o o r d i n a t i n g C o m m i t t e e for Letter a n d G r a p h i c S y m b o l s ( S C C 1 1 ) , acting for the Y 3 2 . 2
T a s k G r o u p o n G r a p h i c S y m b o l s for Electrical a n d Electronics D i a g r a m s of the A m e r i c a n National
Standards C o m m i t t e e Y 3 2 . G r a p h i c S y m b o l s a n d Designations. T h e r e has b e e n close cooperation
b e t w e e n the industry a n d D O D representatives to p r o v i d e o n e standard that can b e universally used,
rather than separate d o c u m e n t s with their t e n d e n c y to differ in various respects. W h i l e credit for this
a c c o m p l i s h m e n t is d u e all participants a n d the organizations they represent, particular mention is given
to the U . S . D e p a r t m e n t of D e f e n s e , w i t h o u t w h o s e strong support in reaching the objectivestandard
s y m b o l s acceptable to b o t h industry a n d the military departmentsthe effort w o u l d not h a v e succeeded.
This standard is c o m p l e m e n t e d b y a n u m b e r of related standards listed in Section 2 3 .

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
T h e American National Standards Committee on Graphic Symbols and Designations, Y32, had the
following personnel at the time it approved this standard:

Charles A . Fricke, Chairman

Conrad R. Muller, Vice Chairman, Electrical and Electronic


James L. Fisher, Jr., Vice Chairman, Mechanical
William L . Hewetson, Vice Chairman, Chemical and Process
Sava I. Sherr, Secretary

Organization Represented Name of Representative


Acoustical Society of America Laurence Batchekler
Harry F. Olson
American Chemical Society Robert F. Schuerer
American Gear Manufacturers Association Gerald L. Scott
American Institute of Chemical Engineers William L. Hewetson
James R. Couper (Alt)
American Institute of Industrial Engineers Irving Goldstein
American Institute of Mining, Metallurgical and Petroleum Engineers J. W . Warren
American Society of Agricultural Engineers James A. Basselman
American Society of Civil Engineers Kenneth R. Jacobs
American Society for Engineering Education I. L. Hill
J. G. McGuire
R. T. Northrup
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers N. LaCourte
C. W . MacPhee (Alt)
American Society of Mechanical Engineers R. W . Cockrell
A. R. Maehell, Jr.
O. J. Maha
. E. Walchli
American Society of Sanitary Engineering James C. Church
American Water Works Association R. R. Kountz
American Welding Society W . E. McKenzie
Association of American Railroads M. F. McCorcle
J. L . M c N a b b
C. W . Martin (Alt)
Association for Computing Machinery Patrick G. Skelly
Canadian Standards Association E. F. V. Robinson
Illuminating Engineering Society L . E . Barbrow
John E. Kaufman (Alt)
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Ralph V . Rice
Daniel Drusdow
G. A. Knapp
Steven A. Wassermann
Sidney V . Soanes
Instrument Society of America George Piatt
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Robert V . Warrick
Mechanical Contractors Association of America J. R. Manee
National Association of Plumbing, Heating, Cooling Contractors R. E. White
National Electrical Contractors Association William H. Paules
Kenneth Priestley
National Electrical Manufacturers Association Walter F. Huette
F. V . Kupchak
E. Neary (Alt)
Roland Russo (Alt)
W . A. Samsonoff (Alt)
National Fluid Power Association James L. Fisher, Jr.
Societv of Automotive Engineers H. L. D u b o c q
Technical Drawing Associates R . N . Austin
Telephone Group Ralph V . Rice
G. A. Eisner
R. E. Thiemer (Alt)
V. S. Department of the Army, Ordnance C A . Nazian
U. S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards Chester H. Page
U. S. Department of Commerce, Patent Office D . M. Mills
U. S. Department of the Interior Richard T. Montgomery
U. S. Department of the Navy Leverett A. Meadows
Western Union Telegraph Company Norman Tierney

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
T h e T a s k G r o u p o n G r a p h i c S y m b o l s , Y 3 2 . 2 , which revised a n d processed this standard, h a d the fol
lowing personnel:
C . A . Fricke*, Chairman
S. A . W a s s e r m a n n * , Secretary

S. J. Balke C. J. Hart A. F. Pomeroy


L. Batchelder J. P. Houckt R. V. Rice*
L. E. Barbrow G. Knapp* E. F. V. Robinson
V. W . Bennett F. V. Kupchak J. W . Siefert
H. L. Cook L. A. Meadows* R. M. Stern*
D . Drusdow C. R. Muller * H. P. Westman
S. K. Ghandi C. A. Nazian J. Zeno
W. Grasson . N. Orr

T h e I E E E Standards Coordinating C o m m i t t e e on Letter a n d G r a p h i c S y m b o l s , S C C 1 1 , h a d the fol


lowing m e m b e r s h i p :

C . R. Muller, Chairman C . A . Fricke, Vice Chairman


. N. Anderson D.M.Howell S. V. Soanes*
J. M. Carroll G. A. Knapp R. M. Stern
H. L. Cook L. A. Meadows L. H. Warren
D. Drusdow L. H. Nelson S. A. Wassermann
H. J. Elschner R. V. Rice J. C. White
. . B. Gross J. W . Siefert

T h e I E E E S u b c o m m i t t e e o n G r a p h i c S y m b o l s , S C C 1 1 . 1 , a n d the I E C Experts Subcommittee, S C C


11.6, h a d the following m e m b e r s h i p :

C . A . Fricke, Chairman S C C 11.1 G. A . K n a p p , Chairman S C C 11.6

. N. Anderson C. R. Muller R. M. Stern


I. M. Berger . N. Orr L. H. Warren (SCC 11.6]
H. L. Cook R. Legg (Alt) J. B. Wailgun (resigned)
D. Drusdow R. V. Rice S. A. Wassermann
C. Glick G. Shapiro R. Rondinelli (Alt)
H. G. Hohner* (SCC 11.6) J. W . Siefert J. Zeno (SCC 11.1)
J. Loebenstein (resigned) S. V. Soanes D. S. Bennett (Alt)
L. A. Meadows

T h e I E E E S u b c o m m i t t e e o n M i c r o w a v e T e c h n i q u e s , S C C 11.7, h a d the following m e m b e r s h i p :

G . Shapiro, Chairman

E. Brigham . T. Ebersol C. R. Muller


J. W . Child C. A. Fricke M. E. Trimm
H. L. Cook R. Giannattasio J. Wilhelm
C. P. Domenchini L. A. Meadows L. Wilson

* Member of Y32.2 Editorial Committee,


t Deceased.

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
Contents
SECTION PAGE SECTION PAGE

Q u i c k Reference to S y m b o l s 1 0
4.6 Switch 30
4.7 Pushbutton, Momentary or Spring-Return . . . 31
Introduction 1 6

4.8 Two-Circuit, Maintained or Not Spring-Re


Section 1 Qualifying S y m b o l s
turn 31
1.1 Adjustability 4.9 Nonlocking Switch, Momentary or Spring-
Return 31
Variability 19
4.10 Locking Switch 31
1.2 Special-Property Indicators 19 4.11 Combination Locking and Nonlocking Switch 31
1.3 Radiation Indicators 19 4.12 Key-Type Switch
1.4 Physical-State Recognition Symbols 19 Lever Switch 31
1.5 Test-Point Recognition Symbol 19 4.13 Selector or Multiposition Switch 31
1.6 Polarity Markings 20 4.14 Limit Switch
1.7 Direction of F l o w of Power, Signal, or Sensitive Switch 32
Information 20 4.15 Safety Interlock 32
1.8 Kind of Current 20 4.16 Switches with Time-Delay Feature 33
1.9 Connection Symbols 21 4.17 Flow-Actuated Switch 33
1.10 Envelope 4.18 Liquid-Level-Actuated Switch 33
Enclosure 21 4.19 Pressure- or Vacuum-Actuated Switch 33
1.11 Shield 4.20 Temperature-Actuated Switch 33
Shielding 21 4.21 Thermostat 33
Section 2 G r a p h i c S y m b o l s for F u n d a m e n t a l 4.22 Flasher
Items ( n o t included in other sections) Self-Interrupting Switch 33
4.23 Foot-Operated Switch
2.1 Resistor 22 Foot Switch 34
2.2 Capacitor 22 4.24 Switch Operated by Shaft Rotation and Re
2.3 Antenna 23 sponsive to Speed or Direction 34
2.4 Attenuator 24 4.25 Switches with Specific Features 34
2.5 Battery 25 4.26 Telegraph Key 34
2.6 Delay Function 4.27 Governor
Delay Line Speed Regulator 34
Slow-Wave Structure 25 4.28 Vibrator, interrupter 34
2.7 Oscillator 4.29 Contactor 34
Generalized Alternating-Current Source 25 4.30 Relay 35
2.8 Permanent Magnet 25
2.9 Pickup Section 5 G r a p h i c S y m b o l s for Terminals
Head 25 and Connectors
2.10 Piezoelectric Crystal Unit 25
2.11 Primary Detector 5.1 Terminals 36
Measuring Transducer 25 5.2 Cable Termination 36
2.12 Squib, Electric 25 5.3 Connector
Disconnecting Device
2.13 Thermocouple 25
Jack
2.14 Thermal Element
Plug 39
Thermomechanical Transducer 25
5.4 Connectors of the T y p e Commonly Used for
2.15 Spark Gap
Igniter Gap 25 Power-Supply Purposes 37
5.5 Test Block 37
Section 3 G r a p h i c S y m b o l s for Transmission 5.6 Coaxial Connector
Path Coaxial Junction 37
5.7 Waveguide Flanges
3.1 Transmission Path Waveguide Junction 37
Conductor
Cable Section 6 G r a p h i c S y m b o l s for Transformers,
Wiring 26 Inductors, and Windings
3.2 Distribution Lines
Transmission Lines 27 6.1 Core 38
3.3 Alternative or Conditional Wiring 27 6.2 Inductor
3.4 Associated or Future 27 Winding
3.5 Intentional Isolation of Direct-Current Path Reactor
in Coaxial or Waveguide Applications . . . . 27 Radio-Frequency Coil
3.6 Waveguide 27 Telephone Retardation Coil 38
3.7 Strip-Type Transmission Line 28 .3 Transductor
3.8 Termination 28 Saturable-Core Inductor
3.9 Circuit Return 28 Saturable-Core Reactor 38
6.4 Transformer
Section 4 G r a p h i c S y m b o l s for Contacts, Telephone Induction Coil
Switches, Contactors, and Relays Telephone Repeating Coil 39
6.5 Linear Coupler 40
4.1 Switching Function 29
4.2 Electrical Contact 29 Section 7 G r a p h i c S y m b o l s for Electron
4.3 Basic Contact Assemblies 29 T u b e s and Related D e v i c e s
4.4 Magnetic Blowout Coil 30
4.5 Operating Coil 7.1 Electron T u b e 41
Relay Coil 30 7.2 General Notes 41

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION PAGE SECTION PAGE
7.3 Typical Applications 42 13.7 Applications: Alternating- and Direct-Current
7.4 Solion Composite 56
Ion-Diffusion Device 43
13.8 Synchro 57
7.5 Coulomb Accumulator
Electrochemical Step-Function Device 43
Section 14 G r a p h i c Symbols for
7.6 Conductivity Cell 43
7.7 Nuclear-Radiation Detector M e c h a n i c a l Functions
Ionization Chamber 14.1 Mechanical Connection
Proportional Counter Tube Mechanical Interlock 58
Geiger-Mller Counter Tube 43 14.2 Mechanical Motion 58
14.3 Clutch
Section 8 G r a p h i c S y m b o l s for Semi Brake 58
conductor D e v i c e s
8.1 Semiconductor Device Section 15 G r a p h i c Symbols C o m m o n l y Used
Transistor
in C o n n e c t i o n with V H F , U H F , SHF
Diode 44
Circuits
8.2 Element Symbols 44
8.3 Special-Property Indicators 45 15.1 Discontinuity 59
8.4 Rules for Drawing Style 1 Symbols 45 15.2 Coupling 59
8.5 Typical Applications, Two-Terminal Devices . 45 15.3 Directional Coupler 60
8.6 Typical Applications, Three- (or more) Termi 15.4 Hybrid
nal Devices 46 Directionally Selective Transmission Devices . 60
8.7 Photosensitive Cell 48 15.5 Mode Transducer 60
8.8 Semiconductor Thermocouple 48 15.6 Mode Suppressor 60
8.9 Hall Element 15.7 Rotary Joint 60
Hall Generator - 48 15.8 Nonreciprocal Devices 60
8.10 Photon-Coupled Isolator 48 15.9 Resonator
8.11 Solid-State Thyratron 48 Tuned Cavity 61
15.10 Resonator (Cavity-Type) Tube 61
Section 9 G r a p h i c S y m b o l s for 15.11 Magnetron 61
Circuit Protectors 15.12 Velocity-Modulation (Velocity-Variation) Tube 61
15.13 Transmit-Receive ( T R ) Tube 61
9.1 Fuse 49
15.14 Traveling-Wave-Tube 61
9.2 Current Limiter 49 15.15 Balun 62
9.3 Lightning Arrester 15.16 Filter 62
Arrester 15.17 Phase Shifter 62
Gap 49 15.18 Ferrite Bead Ring 62
9.4 Circuit Breaker 49 15.19 Line Stretcher 62
9.5 Protective Relay 50

Section 10 G r a p h i c Symbols for Section 16 G r a p h i c Symbols for


Acoustic Devices C o m p o s i t e Assemblies
10.1 Audible-Signaling Device 51 16.1 Circuit Assembly
10.2 Microphone Circuit Subassembly
Telephone Transmitter 51 Circuit Element 63
10.3 Handset 16.2 Amplifier 63
Operator's Set 51 16.3 Rectifier 63
10.4 Telephone Receiver 16.4 Repeater 64
Earphone 16.5 Network
Hearing-Aid Receiver 51 Artifical Line (other than delay line) 64
16.6 Phase Shifter
Section 11 G r a p h i c Symbols for L a m p s Phase-Changing-Network 64
and Visual-Signaling Devices 16.7 Chopper 64
16.8 Diode-Type Ring Demodulator
11.1 Lamp 52
Diode-Type Ring Modulator 64
11.2 Visual-Signaling Device 52

Section 12 G r a p h i c S y m b o l s for Section 17 G r a p h i c Symbols for


Readout Devices A n a l o g Functions
12.1 Meter 17.1 Operational Amplifier 65
Instrument 53 17.2 Summing Amplifier 65
12.2 Electromagnetically Operated Counter 17.3 Integrator (Amplifier) 65
Message Register 53 17.4 Electronic Multiplier 65
17.5 Electronic Divider 65
Section 13 G r a p h i c S y m b o l s for 17.6 Electronic Function Generator 65
Rotating M a c h i n e r y 17.7 Generalized Integrator 65
13.1 Rotating Machine 54 17.8 Positional Servomechanism 65
13.2 Field, Generator or Motor 54 17.9 Function Potentiometer 65
13.3 Winding Connection Symbols 54
13.4 Applications: Direct-Current Machines 54 Section 18 G r a p h i c Symbols for
13.5 Applications: Alternating-Current Machines . 55
13.6 Applications: Alternating-Current Machines Digital L o g i c Functions
with Direct-Current Field Excitation 56 18.1 Digital Logic Functions 65

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION PAGE SECTION PAGE

Section 1 9 G r a p h i c S y m b o l s for Special- Section 2 2 Class D e s i g n a t i o n Letters


Purpose M a i n t e n a n c e Diagrams 22.1 Class Letter 70
19.0 Introduction 66 22.2 Special Considerations for Class Letter Assign
19.1 Data-Flow C o d e Signals 66 ment 70
19.2 Functional Circuits 66 22.3 Item Names 70
22.4 Class Designation Letters (alphabetical list) . 70
Section 2 0 Graphic Symbols C o m m o n l y 22.5 Item Names (alphabetical list) 72
U s e d on System D i a g r a m s , M a p s , a n d
Section 2 3 Revision of A m e r i c a n National
Charts ( C o m m u n i c a t i o n s E q u i p m e n t )
Standards Referred to in This D o c u m e n t . . 73
20.1 Radio Station 67
20.2 Space Station 67 Appendix A Cross Reference List of
20.3 Exchange Equipment 67 C h a n g e d Item N u m b e r s 74
20.4 Telegraph Repeater 67
20.5 Telegraph Equipment 68
Appendix Reference D a t a I E C Publica
20.6 Telephone Set 68
tion 1 1 7 R e c o m m e n d e d Graphical Symbols 74
Section 2 1 Graphic Symbols C o m m o n l y
U s e d on System D i a g r a m s , M a p s , and Appendix C R e v i s e d or D e l e t e d S y m b o l s
Charts ( G e n e r a t i n g Stations a n d ( U S A S Y32.2-1967) 75
Substations)
Appendix D Revised or D e l e t e d S y m b o l s
21.1 Generating Station 69
( U S A S Y32.2-1962 & Supplement U S A S
21.2 Hydroelectric Generating Station 69
Y 3 2 . 2 a - 1 9 6 4 or M I L - S T D - 1 5 - 1 A ) 80
21.3 Thermoelectric Generating Station 69
21.4 Prime Mover 69
21.5 Substation 69 Index follows p a g e 81

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
Subject Section Subject Section
Acoustic devices 10 Mechanical functions 14
Analog computers 17 Meters 12
Antennas 2 Microwave devices 15
Assemblies, composite 16 Motors 13
Attenuators 2 Path, transmission 3
Basic items 2 Permanent magnets 2
Batteries 2 Pickups 2
Block symbols for charts 20 Piezoelectric crystals 2
Block symbols for maps 20 Plugs 5
Capacitors 2 Primary detectors 2
Circuit breakers 9 Protectors, circuit 9
Circuit protectors 9 Qualifiers 1,8,20
Circuit returns 3 Readout devices 12
Class designation letters 22 Reference designations 22
Coils 4, 6 Reference standards 23
Composite assemblies 16 Relays 4
Computers, analog 17 Resistors 2
Computers, digital 18 Rotating machinery 13
Connectors 5 Semiconductor devices 8
Contacts 4 SHF circuit devices 15
Contactors 4 Signaling devices, audible 10
Data flow code signals 19 Signaling devices, visual 11
Delay lines 2 Spark gaps 2
Digital computer logic 18 Special-property indicators 1, 8
Diodes 8 Squibs, electric 2
Distribution lines 3 Switches 4
Electron tubes 7 Synchros 13
Functional symbols 19 System diagrams 20
Fundamental items 2 Terminals 5
Fuses 9 Thermal elements 2
Generating stations 21 Thermocouples 2
Generators 13 Transformers 6
Grounds 3 Transistors 8
High-frequency devices 15 Transmission path 3
Indicators, special-property 1, 8 Tubes, electron 7
Inductors 6 U H F circuit devices 15
Instruments 12 Visual-signaling devices 11
Jacks 5 V H F circuit devices 15
Lamps 11 Waveguides 3
L o g i c diagrams 18 Windings 6,13

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
Quick Reference to Symbols

1. Qualifying Symbols 2.2 Capacitor 3. Transmission Path

1.1 Adjustability 3.1 Transmission Path


Variability 2.3 Antenna Conductor
Cable
/ / y . / Y
Wiring

1.2 Special-Property Indicators 1 rh

t I 2.4 Attenuator

1.3 Radiation Indicators


.
^ '/ ^ & ^ # 2.5 Battery

1.4 Physical State Recognition Symbols


2.6 Delay Function
Delay Line
1.5 Test-Point Recognition Symbol Slow-Wave Structure
lllllll (II )

2.7 Oscillator
1.6 Polarity Markings Generalized Alternating-Current
Source
)))))
+
-- fjj - U

^3ET t3l 2.8 Permanent Magnet
2.9 Pickup
Head
1.7 Direction of Flow of Power,
Signal, or Information 3.2 Distribution lines
Transmission lines

F S V
1.8 Kind of Current

2.10 Piezoelectric Crystal Unit

1.9 Connection Symbols 2.11 Primary Detector


Measuring Transducer 3.3 Alternative or Conditioned Wiring
L -f Z_ LA X

pL. -X-
2.12 Squib, Electrical
3.4 Associated or Future
TUT
1.10 Envelope
Enclosure 3.5 Intentional Isolation of Direct-Cur

o
2.13 Thermocouple rent Path in Coaxial or Waveguide Ap

O
plications
W
3.6 Waveguide
1.11 Shield
Shielding
2.14 Thermal Element
Thermomechanical - i 5 B-
Transducer
- v - - @ - - -

2.15 Spark gap 3.7 Strip-Type Transmission Line


2. Fundamental Items Igniter gap
2.1 Resistor
3.8 Termination

i 1
3.9 Circuit Return

10

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
Quick Reference to Symbols

4. Contacts, Switches, Contactors, 4.10 Locking Switch 4.21 Thermostat


and Relays

4.1 Switching Function


X ~T*~
4.22 Flasher
Self-interrupting switch
-+- 4.11 Combination Locking and Non
locking Switch
4.2 Electrical Contact
o
4.23 Foot-Operated Switch
1 1 L
A
_ _f - Foot Switch
4.12 Key-Type Switch
Lever Switch
C 3 rzzi o
4.24 Switch Operated by Shaft Rotation
and Responsive to Speed or Direction


^ *_' -T V - P

4.3 Basic Contact Assemblies


4.13 Selector or Multiposition Switch

^7 1 t
o-Ua

o o o o o
4.25 Switches with Specific Features
o
TD

V " "

C[ O O O O O Q Cj

ill--

s 4.26 Telegraph Key

4.4 Magnetic Blowout Coil

4.27 Governor
Speed Regulator

4.14 Limit Switch


Sensitive Switch
4.5 Operating Coil 4.28 Vibrator
Relay Coil [^- Interrupter

-0- 0: <> V!
^ ^
J]
ral
4.15 Safety Interlock
4>~ f -
4.29 Contactor
4.6 Switch
4.16 Switches with Time-Delay Feature
in I*
T-T-T
O tyl o ^
-~
^ ^ 1 1.

4.7 Pushbutton, Momentary or Spring-
TOO * DC *"
TTTTT'
Return ,
i Q I O Q I O 4.30 Relay
O O
4.17 Flow-Actuated Switch
ra 1 AC D DP MG
4.18 Liquid-Level-Actuated Switch
4.8 Two-Circuit, Maintained or m 1 DB EP NB
Not Spring-Refurn PI SO SA SW NR
1 SR L ML FO
~*> o ! o
FR
4.19 Pressure- or Vacuum-Actuated
Switch
4.9 Nonlocking Switch, Momentary or , y y
Spring-Return

4.20 Temperature-Actuated Switch ~"| iw j ~"J l'ljlji |M"lj ^

L,
* *_ t

11

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
Quick Reference to Symbols

5. Terminals and Connectors 6.3 Transductor 7.4 Solion


Ion-Diffusion Device
5.1 Terminals ("Ytv->

6.4 Transformer
Telephone induction coil
Telephone repeating coil

7.5 Coulomb Accumulator


Electrochemical Step-
Function Device

5.2 Cable Termination

- 4 -
7.6 Conductivity cell
5.3 Connector
Disconnecting Device

-> ^ D 0 CD 6.5 Linear Coupler


7.7 Nuclear-Radiation Detector
Ionization Chamber
Proportional Counter Tube
Geiger-Mller Counter Tube

<- rvUDvT-
L< > J 7. Electron T u b e s and Related
Devices
5.4 Connectors of the Type Commonly 7.1 Electron Tube
Used for Power-Supply Purposes


8. Semiconductor D e v i c e s
5.1 Semiconductor Device
Transistor
Diode

8.2 Element Symbols


- - - r - r - Q r - Q r
i y y i i .

4
" + ] ^ 1 _L _i_

c y
5.5 Test Blocks

a ->
i. ~ v _ v _

5.6 Coaxial Connector


y j y _u -a

7.2 General Notes _d _d J j ^

5.7 Waveguide Flanges


7.3 Typical Applications 8.3 Special Property Indicators
Waveguide junction

-fr -(K J ] C -11-


6. Transformers, Inductors, and
8.4 Rules for Drawing Style 1 Symbols
Windings
8.5 Typical Applications: Two-Terminal


6.1 Core
Devices
I 3
-it

6.2 Inductor

*
Winding
Reactor


Radio frequency coil
Telephone retardation coil

12

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
Quick Reference to Symbols

8.6 Typical Applications: Three- (or 10. A c o u s t i c D e v i c e s 13.3 Winding Connection Symbols

CO o
More) Terminal Devices
10.1 Audible-Signaling Device O <8> @ i
Q 13.4 Applications: Direct-Current
Machines J

@
10.2 Microphone
D=
10.3 Handset

- Q > k IqfH
Operator's Set

8.7 Photosensitive Cell

8.8 Semiconductor Thermocouple 10.4 Telephone Receiver


Earphone
Hearing-Aid Receivers 13.5 Applications: Alternating-Current
Machines
8.9 Hall Element
Hall Generator

11. L a m p s and Visual-Signaling


Devices

8.10 Photon-coupled isolator 11.1 Lamp

8.11 Solid-state-thyratron

11.2 Visual-Signaling Device 13.6 Applications: Alternating-Current


Machines with Direct-Current Field Ex
citation

9. Circuit Protectors

9.1 Fuse (O) 1 - D i


12. R e a d o u t D e v i c e s 13.7 Applications: Alternating- and
Direct-Current Composite

J
12.1 Meter
Instrument


A DB I OP RF VA
AH DBM INT OSCGSY VAR 13.8 Synchro
9.2 Current Arrester
C DM PH TLM VABH TDX
CDX
CMA DTR UA PI t VI TR
CT
CMC F MA PF THC VU TX
9.3 Lightning Arrester CX
CMV G NM RD TT W RS
Arrester TDR
CRO GD OHM REC V WH
Gap
12.2 Electromagnetically Operated
OD - > Counter
Message Register
llr
14. M e c h a n i c a l Functions
9.4 Circuit Breaker
13. Rotating M a c h i n e r y 14.1 Mechanical Connection

S ' 13.1 Rotating Machine Mechanical Interlock


9.5 Protective Relay 14.2 Mechanical Motion

> < = L ~ rj s-{*]

1
-2)
C F S V 13.2 Field, Generator or Motor
GP W

13

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
Quick Reference to Symbols

14.3 Clutch 15.9 Resonator 16.2 Amplifier


Brake Tuned Cavity

C ^ C_
15.10 Resonator (Cavity Type) Tube BDG EXP PRE
BST LIM PWR
15. C o m m o n l y Used in C o n n e c t i o n CMP MON TRQ
DC PGM
with V H F , U H F , S H F Circuits 15.11 Magnetron
15.1 Discontinuity

16.3 Rectifier
15.12 Velocity-Modulation (Velocity-
Variation) Tube
-Oh -

16.4 Repeater

15.13 Transmit-Receive ( T R ) Tube

- & R - & R A m
15.14 Traveling-Wave-Tube
16.5 Network

15.2 Coupling 16.6 Phase Shifter


Phase-Changing Network
-
15.15 Balun

15.3 Directional Coupler 15.16 Filter 16.7 Chopper

X Kir
15.4 Hybrid I
Directionally Selective
Transmission Devices 16.8 Diode-type ring demodulator
15.17 Phase shifter
Diode-type ring modulator

I k!b


15.5 Mode Transducer 15.18 Ferrite bead rings
17. Analog Functions
17.1 Operational Amplifier

15.6 Mode Suppression 15.19 Line stretcher

15.7 Rotary Joint 17.2 Summing Amplifier


16. C o m p o s i t e Assemblies
-B0B- 16.1 Circuit assembly
15.8 Non-reciprocal devices Circuit subassembly
Circuit element
2 17.3 Integrator
EQ FL-BP RG TPR
FAX FL-HP RU TTY
FL FL-LP DIAL CLK
FL-BE PS TEL IND
ST-INV

14

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
Quick Reference to Symbols

17.4 Electronic Multiplier 20. System D i a g r a m s , M a p s and 21.2 Hydroelectric generating station
Charts


20.1 Radio station

17.5 Electronic Divider


0
21.3 Thermoelectric generating station
20.2 Space station
17.6 Electronic Function Generator

17.7 Generalized Integrator


m la0 ^
20.3 Exchange equipment

=0-

m
21.4 Prime mover

-azr>-
17.8 Positional Servo-mechanism

20.4 Telegraph repeater

17.9 Function Potentiometer


21.5 Substation

20.5 Telegraph equipment O


18. Digital L o g i c Functions

18.1 Digital Logic Functions 22. Class Designation Letters


(See cross references)

A Q TR
19. Special Purpose M a i n t e n a n c e AR EQ L R u
Diagrams AT F LS RE V
20.6 Telephone set FL RT VR
19.1 Data flow code signals BT G MG RV W
C MK S WT
CB HP MP SQ X
CP HR MT SR Y

-v- + CR
DC
HS
HT



TB

DL HY PS TC
DS J PU TP

21. System D i a g r a m s , M a p s and


19.2 Functional symbols

-D>- 4> -o-


Charts

21.1 Generating station

- 3 : -<* -CD-
15

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
INTRODUCTION Introduction INTRODUCTION
A l . l to
A4.1.2 A4.1.2

A l . Scope A2.3 I E C Identification. Symbols and buildups


using symbols that have been r e c o m m e n d e d by
A l . l Purpose. This standard provides a list o f the International Electrotechnical Commission
graphic symbols and class designation letters for are indicated b y E c .
use o n electrical and electronics diagrams.
A2.4 Alternative Symbols. W h e n alternative
A1.2 Definition and Use. Graphic symbols for symbols are shown, the relative position of the
electrical engineering are a shorthand used to symbols does not imply a preference; however,
show graphically the functioning or intercon alternative symbols identified as are recom
nections o f a circuit. A graphic symbol repre mended.
sents the function o f a part in the circuit. Gra 1

A3. Application
phic symbols are used on single-line ( o n e - l i n e )
diagrams, o n schematic or elementary diagrams, A3.1 Generation of Symbols Not Shown (Build
or, as applicable, o n connection or wiring dia u p s ) . An application is an example o f a combi
grams. Graphic symbols are correlated with parts nation of symbols in the list. N o attempt has
lists, descriptions, or instructions b y means of b e e n m a d e to list all possible applications
designations. ( b u i l d u p s ) ; typical applications usually have
been shown using only one of the possible alter
T h e class designation letter portion o f a reference
natives. Additional applications may b e devised
designation is for the purpose of identifying an
using basic symbols in the list to complete the
item b y category or class, using a class letter
buildup, provided they are a reasonable and in
as defined in Section 22 of this standard. T h e
telligible use of the symbols. If a specific sym
assignment of the reference designation should
bol appears in this standard for an item, how
b e in accordance with American National Stan
ever, it shall b e used in lieu of buildup symbols
dard Reference Designations for Electrical and
of the individual elements unless a clarification
Electronics Parts and Equipment, Y32.16-1968
of the internal operation of the item is necessary.
and Supplement N o . 1.
A3.2 Qualifying Symbols (Section 1 ) . Qualify
A2. Arrangement ing symbols may b e a d d e d to symbols if the
special characteristic is important to the function
A2.1 Indexing, Grouping, and Standard Item of the device and aids in the understanding of
Names. All terms appear in the Index. In the the over-all function performed. W h e n the spe
index, "Item" refers to a n u m b e r e d paragraph cial characteristic represented b y the qualifying
in the list o f symbols. Items are arranged sec- symbol is not important to the over-all function
tionally in family groups b y general type. Terms performed, the qualifying symbol may b e omitted
in preferred usage and current alternatives are from the buildup symbols w h i c h appear in this
listed. indicates item names from the Federal standard, provided the absence of the qualifying
Item Identification G u i d e , Cataloging H a n d b o o k symbol will not change the identity of the item.
H6-1 (published b y the Defense Supply A g e n c y , For example, see s y m b o l 2.1.12.1.1.
Defense Logistics Services Center, Battle Creek,
Michigan). A3.3 Application Data Reference. For applica
tion o f these symbols on electrical diagrams, see
American National Standard Drafting Practices
A2.2 Significance o f Columnar Placement of
(Electrical and Electronics D i a g r a m s ) , Y14.45-
Symbols. In the list, graphic symbols appear
1966.
under their respective family names. Symbols
for single-line ( o n e - l i n e ) diagrams appear at the
left in each column; symbols for complete dia
A4. Drafting Practices Applicable
grams appear at the right. Symbols suitable for to Graphic Symbols
all types of diagrams appear in the center. A4.1 Definitions
A4.1.I Single-Line (One-Line) Diagram. A
Symbols appearing only at the right m a y b e diagram w h i c h shows, b y means of single lines
used o n one-line diagrams p r o v i d e d connections and graphic symbols, the course of an electric
are restricted to main signal paths. Symbols ap
circuit or system of circuits and the component
pearing at the left m a y b e used for other dia
devices or parts used therein.
grams p r o v i d e d all connections are shown and
adequate notations are included, if needed. A4.1.2 Schematic or Elementary Dmgram. A
diagram w h i c h shows, b y means of graphic sym
1
For example, when a lamp is employed as a nonlinear resistor, bols, the electrical connections and functions of
the nonlinear resistor symbol is used. For reference designation in
formation, see Section 22 of this standard. a specific circuit arrangement. T h e schematic

16

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION
A4.1.3 to A4.1.3 to
A4.12 A4.12

diagram facilitates tracing the circuit and its func vice, such as a relay or contactor, may b e sep
tions without regard to the actual physical size, arated. If this is done, provide suitable designa
shape, or location o f the c o m p o n e n t d e v i c e or tions to s h o w proper correlation o f the parts.
parts.
A4.9 A n g l e o f C o n n e c t i n g Lines. In general, the
A4.1.3 Symbol. A symbol shall b e considered angle at w h i c h a connecting line is brought to a
as the aggregate o f all its parts. graphic symbol has no particular significance un
A4.2 Orientation. Except where noted, the orien less otherwise noted or shown in this standard.
tation of a symbol on a drawing, including a
mirror-image presentation, does not alter the A4.10 Future or Associated Paths and Equip
meaning of the symbol. Letters and numbers ment. Associated or future paths and equipment
that constitute a part of a s y m b o l shall not b e shall b e shown b y lines c o m p o s e d o f short
presented in mirror-image form. dashes: . For example:

A4.3 Line W i d t h . T h e width of a line does not


affect the meaning of the symbol. In specific
cases, a wider ( h e a v i e r ) line may b e used for
emphasis. A4.11 E n v e l o p e or Enclosure.
A4.11.1 T h e envelope or enclosure symbol
A4.4 Enlargement or R e d u c t i o n . A s y m b o l m a y
shall b e used:
be drawn to any proportional size that suits a
particular drawing, depending o n reduction or ( a ) If the enclosure has an essential operat
enlargement anticipated. If essential for pur ing function, as in an electron tube, solion,
poses of contrast, some symbols may b e drawn switch in an evacuated envelope, etc.
relatively smaller than the other symbols o n a ( b ) If the device envelope is electrically con
diagram. It is r e c o m m e n d e d that only two sizes nected to one of the device elements and
be used on any one diagram. this is an essential ( n o t merely incidental)
functional property of the device.
A4.5 Relative S y m b o l Size. T h e symbols shown
2

in this edition o f the standard are in their cor A4.11.2 T h e envelope or enclosure symbol
rect relative size. This relationship shall b e main should b e used:
tained as nearly as possible o n any particular ( a ) T o emphasize that certain symbols hav
drawing, regardless of the size o f the symbol ing nonconnected lines are a single as
used. sembly (for example, see symbol 8.6.10.5).
( b ) If it is desired to distinguish a class of
A4.6 Arrowheads. T h e arrowhead of a symbol devices, such as transistors or semicon
may b e closed - o r o p e n unless otherwise ductor controlled rectifiers, from other de
noted in this standard. vices ( b u t this should b e consistent for all
devices o f the same class o n any one
A4.7 Terminal Symbols. T h e standard symbol
for a T E R M I N A L ( o ) m a y b e a d d e d to each diagram).
point of attachment of connecting lines to any ( c ) T o associate the parts of symbols having
one o f the graphic symbols. Such a d d e d terminal adjacent characteristic qualifiers ( f o r ex
symbols should not b e considered as part o f the ample: t , T , 0), X ) .
individual graphic symbol, unless the terminal
A4.11.3 T h e envelope or enclosure symbol may
symbol is included in the symbol shown in this
b e omitted:
standard.
F r o m a symbol referencing this paragraph, where
A4.8 Correlation of Symbol Parts. For simplifi confusion w o u l d not result ( b u t this should b e
cation o f a diagram, parts of a symbol for a de- consistently applied to all symbols of the same
class in any one d i a g r a m ) .
!
The symbols shown in this edition of the standard are larger
in size than those shown in the 1967 edition. All of the symbols A4.12 Addition of Supplementary Data. Details
have been prepared so that the connection points are located at
intersections of a modular (incremental) grid. of type, impedance, rating, etc, may b e added
adjacent to any symbol, when required. If used,
abbreviations should b e from American National
Standard Abbreviations for Use o n Drawings,
Z32.13-1950. For military applications, see Sec
tion 23. Letter combinations used as parts of
graphic symbols are not abbreviations or desig
nations.

17

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
INFORMATION INFORMATION
REQUEST REQUEST

R e c o m m e n d a t i o n s for corrections a n d additions to or deletions f r o m this


standard should b e sent to the Secretary, I E E E Standards C o m m i t t e e , In
stitute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, 3 4 5 E a s t 4 7 Street, N e w York,
N . Y . 1 0 0 1 7 , a n d should include the following:

(1) R e q u e s t o r ( n a m e , address, affiliation)

(2) R e a s o n for ( a n d u r g e n c y o f ) request

(3) I t e m namelist all k n o w n n a m e s for the item, including tradenames


( i n c l u d e F e d e r a l Item Identification G u i d e , H a n d b o o k H 6 - 1 , listing
if a p p l i c a b l e )

(4) I t e m definition (list source d o c u m e n t s )

(5) S y m b o l s currently in use or k n o w n to b e u s e d (single-line/schematic/


both)

(6) Proposed symbol

(7) R e f e r e n c e designation class designation letter

(8) A r e a s of application ( m i l i t a r y / i n d u s t r y / c o m m e r c i a l )

(9) Fields of application ( c o m p u t e r / p o w e r / r a d i o , e t c )

(10) Circuit application (amplifier/rectifier/flip-flop, etc)

(11) H a r d w a r e characteristics (microcircuit/conventional, etc)

(12) Present a n d anticipated f r e q u e n c y of use ( p e r circuit/per e q u i p m e n t /


in g e n e r a l )

(13) C o p y of drawing s h o w i n g use of s y m b o l

18

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION I SECTION 1
1.1 to 1.1 to
1.5.2 Qualifying Symbols
1.5.2

1.1 Adjustability 1.2 Special-Property Indicators 1.3.3.1 Sensitivity indicator


Variability
A special function or property essential to
These recognition symbols shall be drawn circuit operation shall be indicated by a
at about 45 degrees across the body of supplementary symbol placed within the
the symbol to which they are applied. envelope or adjacent to the symbol. 1.3.3.2 Emissivity indicator
For typical applications, see symbols
NOTE 1.2A: Basic symbols (such as resistor,
2.1.5, 2.2.4, 2.4.4, and 16.2.5. capacitor, inductor, piezoelectric crystal, etc)
may be used as qualifying symbols to other sym
Use only if essential to indicate special bols for purposes of indicating special properties 1.4 Physical-State Recognition Symbols
property. of the device.
NOTE 1.4A: The rectangle is not part of the
1.2.1 Temperature dependence symbol.
1.1.1 Adjustability (extrinsic adjusta
bility) TEC t
1.4.1 Gas (air); pneumatic
1.1.1.1 General 1.2.2 Magnetic-field dependence

IEC X
IEC
/ 1.2.3 Storage (Greek letter tau)
TEC

1.4.2 Liquid
I I
See Note 1.4A

1.1.1.2 Preset, general


1.2.4 Saturable properties (general)
IEC
May be drawn between or across two or
more windings (see symbol 6.3.1) which See Note 1.4A
1.1.1.3 Linear (shown applied to are magnetically coupled by a saturable
I.I.l.l) core. 1.4.3 Solid

y
1.1,1.4 Nonlinear (shown applied to
TEC J"
1.3 Radiation Indicators (Electromag
netic and Particulate)
CZ1
See Note 1.4A
1.1.1.1) Use only if essential to indicate special 1.4.4 Showing two or more states
property.
Use only if essential to indicate special
IEC NOTE 1.3A: Sensitivity indicator-If the ar condition.
rows point toward the associated symbol, the
principal characteristic of that element is designed NOTE 1.4.4A: A combination of physical
1.1.2 Inherent variability (intrinsic to vary primarily under the influence specified. state recognition symbols indicates a material
variability) in more than one state. The relative sizes and
NOTE 1.3B: Emissivity indicator-If the ar locations of the recognition symbols indicate the
rows point away from the associated symbol, the normal or predominant state of the device.
1.1.2.1 Linear principal characteristic of that element is emis
sion of the radiation specified. NOTE 1.4.4B: Do not rotate or show in
mirror-image form.
IEC
1.3.1 Nonionizing electromagnetic ra
diation (such as radio waves, infrared, 1.4.4.1 Application: Gaseous liquid
1.1.2.2 Nonlinear visible, or ultraviolet light)

1.3.1.1 Sensitivity indicator


ifc
See Notes 1.4.4A and
1.1.3 Special features (shown applied
to the general adjustability symbol) 1.4.4.2 Application: Steam (or moist
1.3.1.2 Emissivity indicator
gas)
1.1.3.1 Continuous
/
<^
TEc 1.3.2 Ionizing electromagnetic radia
tion (such as X-rays and gamma rays)
See Notes 1.4.4.A and
1.1.3.2 In steps
1.5 Test-Point Recognition Symbol
1.3.2.1 Sensitivity indicator Used if necessary to emphasize test points.

1.1.4 Special features (shown applied 1.5.1 General


to the general preset symbol)

1.1.4.1 Continuous
1.3.2.2 Emissivity indicator

TE 1.5.2 Application: test-point recogni
1.3.3 Ionizing particulate radiation tion for a test jack

i
1.1.4.2 In steps
This radiation includes charged particles
such as high-energy electrons (for exam
TEC
ple, beta rays), alpha rays, and protons;
also neutral particles, such as neutrons
and neutral mesons.
NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

19

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 1 SECTION 1
1.5.3 to
1.5.3 to Qualifying Symbols 1.8.5
1.8.5

1.5.3 Application: test-point recogni 1.6.3.2 Application: instantaneous po 1.7.5 Application: one-way circuit ele
tion for the plate of a triode larity markings with potential transformer ment, general
shown
NOTE 1.7.5A: In all cases, indicate the type
of apparatus by appropriate words or letters in
See Note 1.6.3.1.A I E C the rectangle.

Avoid conflict with OR


symbol 4.1 if used on
the same diagram

1.5.4 Application: test-point recogni See Note 1.7.5A


tion for a circuit terminal
1.7 Direction of Flow of Power, Signal,


1.8 Kind of Current (General)
or Information
NOTE 1.8A: Use only if necessary for clarity.
Avoid conflict with symbols 9.5, 9.5.2,
and 9.5.4 if used on the same diagram 1.8.1 Direct current
1.6 Polarity Markings
TEC
1.6.1 Positive 1.7.1 One-way OR
IEC
ilc --
1.7.1A: The lower symbol is used if it To be used in cases when other symbol
is necessary to conserve space. The arrowhead in
1.6.2 Negative the lower symbol shall be filled. is not suitable

IEC ~ 1.8.2 Alternating current


IEC
1.6.3 Instantaneous polarity markings
1.8.3 Alternating current, frequency
These polarity marks shall be used only
ranges
when it is necessary to show the relative
polarity of the windings. Use only if necessary to distinguish
See Note 1.7.1A
among different frequency bands.
NOTE 1.6.3A: Instantaneous polarity of volt
age across windings corresponds at points indi 1.7.2 Either way (but not simultane
cated by polarity marks. Instantaneous direction NOTE 1.8.3A: The "n" is not part of the sym
of current into (or out of) one polarity mark cor ously ) bol. The frequency range shall be substituted for
responds to current out of (or into) the other "n."
polarity mark. If instantaneous currents enter NOTE 1.8.3B: Only one name for the unit of
the windings at the marked points, they will frequency (hertz or cycle per second) should be
produce aiding fluxes. used on any one diagram.
OR
1.8.3.1 Power frequencies
TEC .
OR See Note 1.7.1A
OR
X
1.7.3 Both ways, simultaneously TEC -\-
OR
See Notes 1.8.3.A and
IEC

1.6.3.1 Application: instantaneous po 1.8.3.2 Audio frequencies


larity markings with current transformer TEC %
shown
OR
NOTE 1.6.3.1A: The dots shall be placed near See Note 1.7.1.A
TEC *\-
one end of each coil or winding symbol. The
exact location is immaterial as long as they are See Notes 1.8.3A and
unambiguously placed, especially where other Avoid conflict with symbol 9.2 if used on
windings are drawn nearby. There shall be only the same diagram 1.8.3.3 Superaudio, carrier, and radio
one polarity mark per winding, even if the wind
ing is tapped. The following is NOT permitted: frequencies
1.7.4 Application: one-way, general
-
OR
NOTE 1.7.4A: The "n" is not part of the TEC
symbol. A significant waveform, frequency, or
See Note 1.6.3.1A IEC frequency range shall be substituted for "n." See Notes 1.8.3A and

1.8.4 Direct or alternating current


OR (universal)
Avoid conflict with OR
symbol 4.1 if used on
the same diagram x U_-
OR
OR 1.8.5 Undulating or rectified current

See Note 1.7.4A

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

20
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 1 SECTION 1
1.9 to Qualifying Symbols 1.9 to
1.11.2 1.11.2

1. Connection Symbols 1.9.7.1 3-phase, wye, grounded neutral recognition of the device, or in depicting the de
vice function, e.g., cathode-ray tube, iconoscope,
image orthicon, vidicon, X-ray tube, etc. For
For use adjacent to the symbols; e.g., see The direction of the stroke representing typical applications, see symbols 7.3.6.1 and
symbol 6.4 the neutral can be chosen arbitrarily. 7.3.6.2.2.

1.10.1 General
1.9.1 2-phase 3-wire, ungrounded IEC

TEC I
1.9.8 3-phase 4-wire, ungrounded
1.8.1.1 2-phase 3-wire, grounded
OR

1.9.9 3-phase, zigzag, ungrounded


IEC I

1.9.2 2-phase 4-wire


1.10.2 Split envelope

+ 1.9.9.1 3-phase, zigzag, grounded

TEC
If necessary, envelope may be split.

1.9.2.1 2-phase 5-wire, grounded

1.9.10 3-phase, Scott or


1.10.3 Application: gas-filled envelope
TEC I
The gas-recognition symbol ( d o t ) may
1.9.3 3-phase 3-wire, delta or mesh be located as convenient. See symbol
1.9.11 6-phase, double-delta
1.4.1

(7^)
Ifc A
TEC
1.9.3.1 3-phase 3-wire, delta, grounded ISC
1.9.12 6-phase, hexagonal (or chordal)
_
IEC j TEC O 1.10.4 Application: liquid-filled enve
lope
1.9.13 6-phase, star (or diametrical)
1.9.4 3-phase 4-wire, delta, ungrounded

* The liquid-recognition symbol may be lo


cated as convenient. See symbol 1.4.2

1.9.13.1 6-phase, star, with grounded


IEC
neutral
1.9.4.1 3-phase 4-wire, delta, grounded

f 1.11 Shield
Shielding

1.9.14 6-phase, double zigzag with Normally used for electric or magnetic
1.9.5 3-phase, open-delta neutral brought out and grounded shielding.

TEC /
When used for other shielding, a note
should so indicate. For typical applica
1.9.5.1 3-phase, open-delta, grounded
tions see
at common point
C A P A C I T O R (symbol 2.2.3)
_ I TRANSMISSION PATH (symbols
1.10 Envelope
IEC 3.1.8.1, 3.1.8.2, and 3.1.8.3)
Enclosure
TRANSFORMER (symbols 6.4.2.2
and 6.4.2.3)
1.9.5.2 3-phase, open-delta, grounded T h e general envelope symbol identifies
the envelope or enclosure regardless of
at middle point of one winding 1.11.1 General
evacuation or pressure. W h e n used with
electron-tube component symbols, the These are long dashes.
z_
general envelope symbol indicates a vac
uum enclosure unless otherwise specified.
A gas-filled device may be indicated by a
1.11.2 Optical
dot within the envelope symbol.
1.9.6 3-phase, broken-delta

TEC / \ See paragraph A4.11.1 of the Introduc


tion
1.9.7 3-phase, wye or star, ungrounded
NOTE 1.10A: The shape of the envelope sym
Cross References
Tfc bol may be modified to approximate the distinc
tive shape of a device if the shape will aid in See also Section 19.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A 3 . 1 ) . 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

21

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 2 SECTION 2
2.1 to
Graphic Symbols for 2.1 to
2.2.1 Fundamental Items (not included in other sections) 2.2.1

2.1 Resistor 2.1.6 Symmetrical varistor (intrinsic); 2.1.12 Thermistor; thermal resistor F ] ;
voltage-sensitive resistor F] (silicon car temperature-sensing element
For resistors with nonlinear characteris bide, e t c )
tics, see also B A L L A S T L A M P (symbol NOTE 2.1.12A: Use only if essential to indi
cate special property.
11.1.5)
jec -fc-
NOTE 2.1A: The asterisk is not part of the
symbol. Always add identification within or adja
cent to the rectangle. 2.1.12.1 General
TEC - \ * / ' \ -
2.1.1 General TEC
*See Note 2.1A

2.1.12.1.1 Linear
IEC WV-

2.1.7 Magnetoresistor (intrinsic) (lin See Note 2.1.12A


ear type s h o w n )
iEc I * r~ 2.1.12.1.2 Nonlinear

'See Note 2.1A mc -fc


2.1.2 Tapped resistor 2.1.8 Heating resistor See Note 2.1.12A

2.1.12.1.3 Positive temperature coeffi


JEC
OR cient

- f r y
OR 1 1
*See Note 2.1A
+t
2.1.9 Instrument or relay shunt See Note 2.1.12A
TEC j * \
11 2.1.12.1.4 Negative temperature coeffi
*See Note 2.1 A
Connect instrument or relay to terminals
cient
in the rectangle
2.1.3 Application: with adjustable con
tact. See also symbol 14.2.5

See Note 2.1.12A


2.1.10 Shunt resistor


IEC VvV-
2.1.12.2 With independent integral
heater

IEC I * [
j See Note 2.1A
S e e Note 2.1 A
2.1.4 Application: adjustable or contin
2.1.11 Resistive termination 2.1.12.2.1 Nonlinear
uously adjustable (variable) resistor fj ;
rheostat
Commonly used in coaxial and wave
guide diagrams.

OK See Note 2.1.12A


2.1.11.1 Application: series resistor and
path open 2.1.13 Symmetrical photoconductive
I E C \*/^Y
V transducer (resistive)

*See Note 2.1A


2.1.11.2 Application: series resistor and
2.1.5 Nonlinear resistor (intrinsic) path short-circuited

V W ^
IEC -yr- 2.2 Capacitor
2.1.11.3 Bolometer element (
lines indicate direct-current connections 2.2.1 General
OR
and are not part of the symbol)
If it is necessary to identify the capacitor
electrodes, the curved element shall rep
resent the outside electrode in fixed pa
*See Note 2.1 A per-dielectric and ceramic-dielectric ca-

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

22
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 2 SECTION 2
2.2.2 to
Graphic Symbols for 2.2.2 to
2.3.2 Fundamental Items (not included in other sections) 2.3.2

pacitors, the moving element in adjust 2.2.10 Capacitive termination NOTE 2.2.16A: The dagger is not part of the
symbol. If specific indication is desired, the dag
able and variable capacitors, and the ger is to be replaced by a letter combination
low-potential element in feed-through ca Commonly used on coaxial and wave from item 12.1, Note 12.1A.
pacitors. guide diagrams.

TEC )L_ 2.2.10.1 Application: series capacitor


and path open
2.2.2 Polarized capacitor


2.2.10.2 Application: series capacitor
and path short-circuited * See Note 2.2.11A
fSee Note 2.2.16A
7 ha
2.2.3 Shielded capacitor 2.2.17 Application: coupling capacitor
2.2.11 Coupling capacitor (for power- potential device (used only to provide a
.1 line carrier) power-system-frequency voltage)

Ll'J NOTE 2.2.11A: The asterisk is not part of the


symbol. If specific identification is desired, the
2.2.4 Adjustable or variable capacitor asterisk is to be replaced by one of the following
letter combinations:
If it is necessary to identify trimmer ca
pacitors, the letter should appear COM Carrier communication
adjacent to the symbol. LC Carrier load control
REL Carrier relaying tSee Note 2.2.16A
SUP Carrier supervisory
TLM Carrier telemetering
2.3 Antenna
TT Carrier transferred trip
2.2.5 Application: adjustable or vari
2.3.1 General
able capacitors with mechanical linkage Types or functions may be indicated by
of units words or abbreviations adjacent to the
symbol.

Qualifying symbols may be added to the


S e e Note 2.2.11 A antenna symbol to indicate polarization,
direction of radiation, or special applica
2.2.12 Feed-through capacitor (with tion.
2.2.6 Continuously adjustable or vari terminals shown on feed-through element
able differential capacitor for clarity) If required, the general shape of the
main lobes of the antenna polar diagrams
The capacitance of one part increases as Commonly used for bypassing high-fre may be shown adjacent to the symbol.
the capacitance of the other part de quency currents to chassis. Notes may be added to show the direc
creases. tion and rate of lobe movement.

The stem of the symbol may represent


IEC any type of balanced or unbalanced
2.2.13 Application: feed-through ca feeder, including a single conductor.
pacitor between 2 inductors with third
lead connected to chassis
2.2.7 Phase-shifter capacitor

IEC
1
OR
2.2.14 Capacitor bushing for circuit
T breaker or transformer
2.2.8 Split-stator capacitor Y
The capacitances of both parts increase
simultaneously. 2.3.1.1 Application: turnstile antenna
2.2.15 Application: capacitor-bushing
potential device
TURNSTILE

2.2.9 Shunt capacitor


4 I

2.2.16 Application: carrier-coupling


IEC

2.3.2 Dipole

capacitor potential device (used to pro


vide a power-system-frequency voltage *
and also coupling for carrier signals)

NOTES; 1. See Introduction for general information {note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

23
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 2 SECTION 2
Graphic Symbols for 2.3.3 to
2.3.3 to
2.4.6 Fundamental Items (not included in other sections) 2.4.6

2.3.3 L o o p 2.3.6.1 Fixed in azimuth 2.3.7.5 Direction finding, radio goni


ometer, or radio beacon antenna
TEC

2.3.6.2 Adjustable in azimuth

TEC .y- 11-:<'



OR
2.3.6.3 Fixed in elevation ~ ><
2.3.7.6 Antenna with direction of radi
ation fixed in azimuth, vertically polar
ized, with horizontal polar diagram
2.3.4 Antenna counterpoise F)
2.3.6.4 Adjustable in elevation

HE )( -o-
2.3.6.5 Fixed in azimuth and elevation
2.3.7.7 Radar antenna, rotating 4
IEC /
times per minute in azimuth and re
rti ciprocating in elevation, 0 to 57 to 0
2.3.6.6 Direction finder, radio goniom in one second
2.3.5 Qualifying symbols to indicate eter or beacon
polarization
TEC X
Use only if essential to indicate special I/SEC
2.3.6.7 Rotation 0 . . 5 7 . . 0
e

property of an antenna.

2.3.5.1 Plane polarization See symbols 14.2.3, 14.2.4; see Note


2.3.6.B
TEC - -4/MIN

2.3.6.8 Alternating or reciprocating


2.3.5.2 Application: antenna with hori
zontal polarization TEC r\j See Note 2.3.6B

2.3.7 Application: antenna with quali 2.4 Attenuator


IEC
fying symbols and notes
2.4.1 Fixed attenuator F | ; pad (gen
2.3.7.1 Antenna with direction of radi eral)
ation fixed in azimuth
2.3.5.3 Application: antenna with ver
tical polarization
^ H

\|/t 2.4.2 Balanced, general

2.3.7.2 Antenna with direction of radi


ation adjustable in azimuth
2.3.5.4 Circular polarization
2.4.3 Unbalanced, general

-
2.3.5.5 Application: antenna with cir
cular polarization 4 -
2.3.7.3 Antenna with direction of radi
ation fixed in azimuth, horizontal polari 2.4.4 Variable attenuator ] (general)
zation

2.3.6 Qualifying symbols to indicate


direction of radiation 2.4.5 Balanced, general

Use only if essential to indicate special


2.3.7.4 Antenna with adjustable direc
property of an antenna.
tivity in elevation

Y
NOTE 2.3.6A: Any applicable adjustability 2.4.6 Unbalanced, general
symbol (item 1.1) may be used to supplement a
qualifying symbol. IEC

NOTE 2.3.6B: Antenna rotation can be ac


complished by electromechanical or electronic z f c
means.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

24
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 2 SECTION 2
2.5
Graphic Symbols for 2.5 to
2.15 Fundamental Items (not included in other sections) 2.15

2.5 Battery 2.8 Permanent Magnet Avoid conflict with symbol 3.6.4 if used

J
on the same diagram
The long line is always positive, but p o
TEC
larity may be indicated in addition. Ex
ample: 2.9 Pickup
Head 2.13 Thermocouple (dissimilar-metals
IEC
device)
2.9.11 General

>
2.5.1 Generalized direct-current source 2.13.1 Temperature-measuring

i TEC l^J
2.9.2 Writing; recording; head, sound-
2.5.2 One cell
recorder F ] 2.13.2 Current-measuring

>
IEC
NOTE 2.13.2A: Explanatory words and ar
2.5.3 Multicell rows are not part of the symbols shown.
2.9.3 Reading; playback; head, sound-
IEC 2.13.2.1 With integral heater internally
reproducer FJ
connected
2.5.4 Multicell battery with 3 taps
IEC

He ~ , l
y y y | ,
~ 2.9.4 Erasing; magnetic eraser F ]
ER
2.5.5 Multicell battery with adjustable TEC See Note 2.13.2A
tap
2.9.5 t Application: writing, reading, 2.13.2.2 With integral insulated heater

IEC 1 1 and erasing


4
See paragraph A4.11 of the introduction
IEC
2.6 Delay Function
Delay Line
2.9.6 Stereo
Slow-Wave Structure EATER
See Note 2.13.2A
2.6.1 General

NOTE 2.. 1A: Length of delay may be indi


cated. Asterisk is not part of symbol. 2.13.3 Thermopile

w
2.10 Piezoelectric Crystal Unit (includ
NOTE 2.6.IB: The two vertical lines indicate ing Crystal Unit, Quartz )
input side.

I 11 I I I I 2.11 % Primary Detector 2.14 Thermal Element


Measuring transducer Thermomechanical Transducer

>
OR
See also H A L L G E N E R A T O R (item 8.9) Actuating device, self-heating or with ex
and T H E R M A L C O N V E R T E R (item ternal heater. ( N o t operated primarily by
- c
12.1) ambient temperature.) See item 9.1 for
*See Note 2.6.1 A
fuses, one-time devices. See item 4.30.5
for thermally operated relay.
2.6.2 Tapped delay function

2.12 Squib, Electric


1*1* I * OR
2.12.1 Explosive
*See Note 2.6.1A

2.6.3 Bifilar slow-wave structure


- - 2.15 Spark Gap
Igniter Gap
Commonly used in traveling-wave tubes. 2.12.2 Igniter
USE SYMBOL 9.3.1

*See Note 2.6.1 A


2.12.3 Sensing link; fusible link, am
2.7 Oscillator
bient-temperature operated
Generalized Alternating-Current
Source Cross References
Semiconductor Thermocouple
t The broken line indicates where line
connection to a symbol is made and is not part (item 8.8)
of the symbol.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

25
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 3 SECTION 3
Graphic Symbols for 3.1 to
3.1 to
3.1.9 Transmission Path 3.1.9

3.1 Transmission Path 3.1.5 Crossing of paths or conductors 3.1.7.3 Quad


Conductor not connected
Cable
Wiring The crossing is not necessarily at a 90-
3.1.1 Guided path, general degree angle.

A single line represents the entire group


of conductors or the transmission path 3.1.8 Assembled conductors; cable
needed to guide the power or signal. For
coaxial and waveguide work, the recogni Commonly used in communication dia
tion symbol is used at the beginning
3.1.6 Junction of paths or conductors grams.
and end of each kind of transmission
path and at intermediate points as needed 3.1.8.1 Shielded single conductor
for clarity. In waveguide work, mode may 3.1.6.1 Junction (if desired)
be indicated. I E C
TEC IEC -t
When required, the length between two
significant points may be indicated, e.g., 3.1.6.2 Application: junction of paths, OR
/4. TSS. conductors, or cables. If desired, indicate
When required, details of structure (e.g., path type, or size
elbow), type, impedance, ratings, etc, 3.1.8.2 Application: shielded 5-con-
may be added adjacent to or within any ductor cable
symbol or in a note, I E C 3.1.6.3 Application: junction of con
-Pr-
See also item 3.2.1 nected paths, conductors, or wires
++-
IEC
++-
3.1.1.1 Bus bar (with connections -H-
shown) y
Use only if essential to distinguish bus OR
from other circuit paths. 3.1.8.3 Application: shielded 5-con-
ductor cable with conductors separated
on the diagram for convenience
IEC
OR R

OR ONLY IF REQUIRED
-++
3.1.2 Conductive path or conductor; BY LAYOUT CONSIDERATIONS v -
wire
IEC
-tr-
3.1.2.1 Two conductors or conductive
paths IS. 1.8.4 Application: shielded 2-con-
jj T E C TEC ' For microwave circuits, the type of cou
ductor cable with shield grounded

3.1.2.2 Three conductors or conductive pling, power-division proportions, reflec


paths tion coefficients, plane of junction, etc.,
/ / / TEC TEC
may be indicated if desired.

3.1.6.4 Splice (if desired) of same size 3.1.8.5 2-conductor cable


3.1.2.3 "n" conductors or conductive
cables. Junction of conductors of same
paths
size or different size cables. If desired, in TEC
NOTE 3.1.2.3A: The "n" is not part of the dicate sizes of conductors
symbol. A number representing the actual num
ber of paths shall be substituted for "n". SPLICE 3.1.8.6 Application: 5-conductor cable

"n" conductors

OR 3.1.7 Associated conductors


Draw individual paths
3.1.7.1 Pair (twisted unless otherwise
specified) 1

See Note 3.1.2.3A


1
3.1.3 Air or space path OR
3.1.9 t Coaxial cable, recognition sym
See also symbol 3.2.6 bol; coaxial transmission path;
radio-frequency cable F ]
(coaxial)
3.1.7.2 Triple (twisted unless other
3.1.4 Dielectric path other than air
wise specified)
Commonly used for coaxial and wave
guide transmission.
t The broken line indicates where the
DIEL
outer conductor connection to a symbol is made
and is not part of the symbol.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

26
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 3 SECTION 3
Graphic Symbols for 3.1.9.1 to
3.1.9.1 to
3.6 Transmission Path 3.6

NOTE 3.1.9A: If necessary for clarity, an NOTE 3.1.1 IB: The asterisk is not part of the These are long dashes.
outer-conductor connection shall be made to the symbol. Identifying values, letters, numbers, or
symbol. marks shall replace the asterisk.

NOTE 3.1.9B: If the coaxial structure is not


maintained, the tangential line shall be drawn
only on the coaxial side.
1 3.2.6.1 Application: radio link (with
antenna shown)

3.1.9.1 General


*See Note 3.1.11B

3.2 Distribution Lines OR

< >
Transmission Lines
See Note 3.1.9A
Commonly used on system diagrams,
3.1.9.2 Application: coaxial structure maps, and charts.
not maintained on the right
3.2.6.2 Application: radio link carrying
3.2.1 Type of circuit
television (video with sound) and tele
USE SYMBOL 3.1.1 phony (with antenna shown)
See Note 3.1.9B

<
3.1.10 Grouping of leads The following letters may be used to in
V+S+F \
dicate type of transmission: ^

3.1.10.1 General
F telephony H e
Bend of line indicates direction in which S sound (television) I E C
3.3 Alternative or Conditional Wiring
other end of path will be found. telegraphy T E C
transmission of data I E C

* ) ) ) ) ) V video (television) I E C
The arrowheads in this case shall be
solid.
OR 3.2.1.1 Application: telephone line
NOTE 3.3A: A note shall explain the connec
tions.

a-
OR
3.2.2 Cable underground; underground
line
V I J J J J J See Note 3.3A

OR 3.3.1 Application: 3 alternative paths

These are long dashes.


OR
Avoid conflict with symbol 3.2.6 if used
3.1.10.2 Interrupted (on diagram),
shown with individual paths at each side
on the same diagram.

of diagrammatic interruption. 3.2.3 Submarine line; underwater line

TEC
The lower symbol consists of long dashes. See Note 3.3A
3.2.4 Overhead line
3.4 Associated or Future
Avoid conflict with symbol 3.6.1 if used
on the same diagram. See also paragraph A4.10 of the Intro
duction
ffc 0
These are short dashes.
3.2.5 Loaded line
3.1.11 Interrupted path
Avoid conflict with symbol 6.4.18 if used
Symbol normally used only when re on the same diagram. 3.5 Intentional Isolation of Direct-Cur
quired for complex or special-purpose di rent Path in Coaxial or Wave
agrams. guide Applications

NOTE 3.1.IIA: To ensure continuity, the 3.2.6 Radio link


interrupted-path break points must be in align
ment.
Use only if essential to distinguish radio 3.6 Waveguide S
links or any radio portion of a circuit.
The mode of propagation or other special
t The broken line indicates where the characteristics may be shown at the side
outer conductor connection to a symbol is made Avoid conflict with symbol 3.2.2 if used
and is not part of the symbol. on the same diagram. of the waveguide symbol.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

27
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 3 SECTION 3
3.6.1 to
Graphic Symbols for 3.6.1 to
3.9.3.2 Transmission Path 3.9.3.2

3.6.1 Circular, recognition symbol 3.S Termination NOTE 3.9.3A: The asterisk is not part of the
symbol. Identifying values, letters, numbers, or
marks shall replace the asterisk. For the triangu
Avoid conflict with symbol 3.2.4 if used Commonly used on coaxial and wave lar symbol, this identification shall be placed
on the same diagram. guide diagrams. within the triangle or, if essential for legibility,
adjacent to the triangle.
TEC 0
3.8.1 Open circuit (open). Not a fault.
3.9.3.1 Specific potential difference
3.6.2 Rectangular, recognition symbol

0
To be used when there is a specific po
TEC tential difference with respect to a poten
3.8.2 Short circuit (short). Not a fault.
tial reference level.
3.6.2.1 Dielectric-filled metallic rec
tangular waveguide NOTE 3.8.2A: Use of the dot is optional.
I
See Note3.9.3A

3.9.3.2 Potential level not specified by


3.6.2.2 Solid-dielectric rectangular See Note 3.8.2A
a numerical value
waveguide
3.8.3 Application: movable short cir To be used when identically annotated
IEC cuit common-return connections are at the
-H-
same potential level.
3.6.2.3 Gas-filled rectangular wave
guide

See Note 3.8.2A


*See Note 3.9.3A
3.6.3 Coaxial waveguide 3.9 Circuit Return

See also item 3.1.9 3.9.1 Ground

TEC ( 1 ) A direct conducting connection to Cross References


the earth or body of water that is a part
3.6.4 Flexible waveguide
thereof.
Avoid conflict with symbol 2.12.3 if used ( 2 ) A conducting connection to a
on the same diagram. structure that serves a function similar to
that of an earth ground (that is, a struc
ture such as a frame of an air, space, or
land vehicle that is not conductively con
3.6.5 Twisted waveguide nected to earth).

IEC

3.6.6 Ridged waveguide

3.9.2 Chassis or frame connection;


equivalent chassis connection
(of printed-wiring boards)
3.6.7 Goubau line (single-wire trans
mission line within solid dielectric)
A conducting connection to a chassis or
-HH- frame, or equivalent chassis connection of
a printed-wiring board. The chassis or
3.7 Strip-Type Transmission Line frame (or equivalent chassis connection
of a printed-wiring board) may be at
3.7.1 Unbalanced stripline substantial potential with respect to the
earth or structure in which this chassis or
TEC
frame (or printed-wiring board) is
mounted.
OK

3.7.2 Balanced stripline


1
3.9.3 Common connections

OR
Conducting connections made to one an
other.

All like-designated points are connected.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

28
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 4 SECTION 4
4.1 to
Graphic Symbols for
4.1 to
4.3.5 Contacts, Switches, Contactors, and Relays 4.3.5

4.1 Switching Function 4.2.2.1 Adjustable or sliding contact Equipment, C37.2-1962, for further de
for resistor, inductor, etc tails.
NOTE 4.1A: Switching function symbols are
suitable for use on "detached contact" diagrams,
but may be used in other applications. In the parallel-line contact symbols
shown below, the length of the parallel
4.1.1 Conducting, closed contact lines shall be approximately VA times the
(break) 4.2.2.2 Locking width of the gap (except for symbol
4.3.7).

4.3.1 Closed contact (break)


4.1.2 Nonconducting, open contact 4.2.2.3 Nonlocking
(make)
TEC ^

4.2.2.4 Segment; bridging contact


4.1.3 Application: transfer OR
See also items 4.13.3 and 4.13.4

j
I X
OR

OR


4.2.2.5 Vibrator reed OR
T E C o-rj

_ 1
4.3.2 Open contact (make)
4.2 Electrical Contact 4.2.2.6 Vibrator split reed

For buildups or forms using electrical


contacts, see applications under CON
NECTOR (item 5.3) 4.2.2.7 Rotating contact (slip ring) "
IEC

-o-
and brush
See paragraph A4.6 of the Introduction

4.2.1 Fixed contact


4.3 Basic Contact Assemblies
4.2.1.1 Fixed contact for jack, key, re IEC
lay, etc
The standard method of showing a con
4.3.3 Transfer
tact is by a symbol indicating the circuit
condition it produces when the actuating
OR device is in the deenergized or nonoper-
ated position. The actuating device may
_ t be of a mechanical, electrical, or other
nature, and a clarifying note may be nec
OR essary with the symbol to explain the
proper point at which the contact func
1
tions; for example, the point where a
4.2.1.2 Fixed contact for switch contact closes or opens as a function of IEC O 7^

o changing pressure, level, flow, voltage,


OR
current, etc. In cases where it is desirable
OR to show contacts in the energized or op
IEC
erated condition and where confusion
may result, a clarifying note shall be
4.2.1.3 Fixed contact for momentary added to the drawing.
switch 4.3.4 Make-before-break

FT1
Auxiliary switches or contacts for circuit
See also items 4.9 and 4.11.
breakers, etc, may be designated as fol
lows:

( a ) Closed when device is energized 4.3.5 Application: open contact with


4.2.1.4 Sleeve or operated position. time closing (TC) or time-delay closing

1
( b ) Closed when device is in deener ( T D C ) feature
gized or nonoperated position.
(aa) Closed when operating mecha
nism of main device is in energized or
operated position.
(bb) Closed when operated mecha TC

1
nism of main device is in deenergized or OR

L
OR nonoperated position.


See American National Standard Manual
TOC
and Automatic Station Control, Supervi
4.2.2 Moving contact sory, and Associated Telemetering

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

29
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 4 SECTION 4
4.3.6 to
Graphic Symbols for 4.3.6 to
4.6.7 Contacts, Switches, Contactors, and Relays 4.6.7

4.3.6 Application: closed contact with NOTE 4.5A: The asterisk is not part of the The standard method of showing
symbol. Always replace the asterisk by a device switches is in a position with no operat
time opening ( T O ) or time-delay open designation. See, for example, ANSI C37.2-
ing ( T D O ) feature 1962. ing force applied. For switches that may

^ 0
be in any of two or more positions with
no operating force applied, and for
switches actuated by some mechanical

q:
device (as in air-pressure, liquid-level,
OR
rate-of-flow, etc, switches), a clarifying
note may be necessary to explain the
He point at which the switch functions.
TOO
OR
When the basic switch symbols in items
TEC < ^ > 4.6.1 through 4.6.3 are shown in the
closed position on a diagram, terminals
4.3.7 Time sequential closing OR must be added for clarity.

li OR
1 (*) *See Note 4.5A

4.5.1 Semicircular dot indicates inner


4.6.1 Single-throw, general

4.6.2 Double-throw, general

r-
end of winding

4.3.8 Multiway transfer switch

4.3.8.1 Two-position switch (90 step)


-0- OR
4.6.2.1 Application: 2-pole double-
throw switch with terminals shown
-
I

4.5.2 Application: multiwinding coil (2 o o-" o


1

windings shown) 4.6.3 Knife switch F] , general

NOTE 4.5.2A: The ends of a given winding


shall be shown directly opposite each other on
opposite sides of the core, or adjacent to each
4.3.8.2 Three-position switch (120 other on the same side of the core. 4.6.4 Application: 3-pole double-throw
step) knife switch with auxiliary contacts and
terminals

ISC <H(-o <HH>i


See Note 4.5.2A

4.5.3 Electromagnetic actuator F ]


4.3.8.3 Four-position switch (45 step) (solenoid), with mechanical linkage
shown
NOTE 4.5.3A: The mechanical linkage may
be omitted if the intent is clear. 4.6.5 Application: 2-pole field-dis
IEC O ^jU^ O
charge knife switch with terminals and

1
discharge resistor
IEC IF NOTE 4.6.5A: The asterisk is not part of the
symbol. Always add identification within or ad
OR jacent to the rectangle.
4 . 4 | Magnetic Blowout Coil
o

{
*See Note 4.6.5A

See Notes 4.5A and 4.5.3A 4.6.6 Switch with horn gap
4.5 Operating Coil
4.6 Switch / C
Relay Coil 0
See also FUSE (item 9.1); and para 4.6.7 Sector switch \
See also INDUCTOR; W I N D I N G ; etc graphs A4.7 and A4.9 of the Introduction
(item 6.2)
Fundamental symbols for contacts, me IEC
X The broken line indicates where line
connection to a symbol is made and is not part chanical connections, etc, may be used
of the symbol. for switch symbols.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

30
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 4 SECTION 4
4.7 to
Graphic Symbols for 4.7 to
4.13.1 Contacts, Switches, Contactors, and Relays 4.13.1

4.7 Pushbutton F ) Momentary or 4.9.5 Make-before-break 4.12.2 3-position with nonlocking


Spring-Return transfer and locking break contacts

4.7.1 Circuit closing (make)

4.10 Locking Switch


_L
o o The symbols to the left are commonly O -
4.7.2 Circuit opening (break) used for spring buildups in key switches,
OR
relays, and jacks.

Q_LD
1
1
The symbols to the right are commonly V T O
used for toggle switches.
4.7.3 Two-circuit
4.10.1 Circuit closing (make) 4.12.3 3-position, multicontaet combi
1o nation
o
\ OR - ~ 0
O O y

4.10.2 Circuit opening ( b r e a k )


4.8 Two-Circuit, Maintained or Not P"
Spring-Return o-
OR

<J~1~ o ! o
4.10.3 Transfer, 2-position
0
il
O OR O - ^ ^
4.9 Nonlocking Switch, Momentary or
t
OP
Spring-Return
4.10.4 Transfer, 3-position
*
The symbols to the left are commonly
used for spring buildups in key switches,
relays, and jacks.
OFF IEC TT"
/
The symbols to the right are commonly 4.10.5 Make-before-break
used for toggle switches. o - o

t!
4.9.1 Circuit closing ( m a k e ) ti
o t
OR 4.11 Combination Locking and Nonlock
t
ing Switch 4.12.4 2-position, half of key switch
4.9.2 Circuit opening ( b r e a k ) normally operated, multicontaet combi
Commonly used for toggle switches nation

c L O R
4.11.1 3-position, 1-pole: circuit closing
( m a k e ) , off, momentary circuit closing
4.9.3 Two-circuit
(make)

See Note 14.1.1A

t
4.13 Selector or Multiposition Switch
4.11.2 3-position, 2-pole: circuit closing
o u
( m a k e ) , off, momentary circuit closing

(make) T h e position in which the switch is
OR
u. shown may be indicated by a note or
O designation of switch position.
o A
I 4.13.1 General (for power and control
t
o ^ > ^ - diagrams)
OR
4.12 Key-Type Switch Any number of transmission paths may
Lever Switch 3 be shown.
O I o

4.12.1 2-position with locking transfer


4.9.4 Transfer and break contacts

OR
OR

t
"~\ O O

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information ( n o t e especially A 3 . 1 ) . 2 . Symbols for single-line ( o n e - l i n e ) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

31

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 4 SECTION 4
4.13.2 to
Graphic Symbols for 4.13.2 to
4.15.1 Contacts, Switches, Contactors, and Relays 4.15.1

4.13.2 Break-before-make, nonshorting 4.13.8 Slide switch typical ladder- 4.14 Limit Switch
(nonbridging) during contact transfer type interlock Sensitive Switch F]

In the example, one slide is shown oper NOTE 4.14A: Identify by LS or other suit
able note.
ated.
4.14.1 Track-type, circuit-closing con
O Slides are shown in released position un
tact
less otherwise noted.
OR

O O O

4.13.3 Make-before-break, shorting


See Note 4.14A
(bridging) during contact transfer
4.14.2 Track-type, circuit-opening
contact

OR
o
.1

<Hr
4.13.9 Master or control switch See Note4.14A

0 O O A table of contact operation must be 4.14.3 Lead-screw type, circuit-open


4.13.4 Segmental contact shown on the diagram. A typical table is ing contacts
shown below.

\
o DETACHED CONTACTS ESS"
SHOWN ELSEWHERE I I
31 ON DIAGRAM
INDICATOR
CONTACT POSITION
See Note 4.14A
OR A I c
1 -f X
q O C[ 4.14.4 Rotary-type
-
5-1
X
X
T - I X 1 11\
4.13.5 22-point selector switch X-INDICATES
CONTACTS CLOSED I I II I I II
Irr-t-Bll I I
" ; ' III I
4.13.10 Master or control switch (cam I I I o n ' II
operated contact assembly), 6-circuit 3
See Note4.14A
point reversing switch
4.14.5 Limit switch, directly actuated,
4.13.6 10-point selector switch with A table of contact operation must be
spring returned
fixed segment shown on the diagram. A typical table is
_
shown below. Tabulate special features
4.14.5.1 Normally open
in note.
DETACHED CONTACTS
SHOWN ELSEWHERE
ON DIAGRAM
V o

4.13.7 Rotary (section- deck- or


wafer-type) switch F ] 4.14.5.2 Normally openheld closed

Viewed from end opposite control knob


or actuator unless otherwise indicated.
For more than one section, the first sec 4.14.5.3 Normally closed
tion is the one nearest control knob or ac
| X - INDICATES
tuator. When contacts are on both sides, , CONTACT! _CLOSCO _

front contacts are nearest control knob.


4.13.11 Drum switch, sliding-contact 4.14.5.4 Normally closedheld open
type, typical example

9 S EVENSE II 1 3 I
8 II FOWBJABO 1 "

4.15 Safety Interlock

If specific type identification is not re


quired, use applicable standard symbol.
4.15.1 If specific type identification is
required: circuit opening
OR

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

32
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 4 SECTION 4
4.15.2 to
Graphic Symbols for 4.15.2 to
4.22 Contacts, Switches, Contactors, and Relays 4.22

4.15.2 If specific type identification is 4.17.2 Opens on increase in flow 4.21.1.1 With contact-motion direction
required: circuit closing clarified

.V -X-
4.16 Switches with Time-Delay Feature 4.18 Liquid-Level-Actuated Switch See Note 4.21B

4.21.2 Opens on rising temperature


NOTE 4.16A: The point of the arrow indi 4.18.1 Closes on rising level
cates the direction of switch operation in which
contact action is delayed.
o t

See Note 4.21 A


4.16.1 Open switch with time-delay
closing (TDC) feature
4.18.2 Opens on rising level 4.21.3 Transfers on rising temperature

If
TDC
OR See Note 4.21A
4.19 Pressure- or Vacuum-Actuated
Switch 4.21.4 Transfer, with intended central-
off (neutral) position
4.19.1 Closes on rising pressure
See Note 4.16A
o " 1

4.16.2 Closed switch with time-delay


opening ( T D O ) feature t 2
See Notes 4.21 A and
4.19.2 Opens on rising pressure
4.21.5 Application: multifunction,


TOO typical
OR
4.20 Temperature-Actuated Switch
4
4.20.1 Closes on rising temperature
O See Notes 4.21A and
See Note 4.16A
4.21.6 With integral heater and trans
4.16.3 Open switch with time-delay fer contacts
opening ( T D O ) feature
Use only if essential to indicate integral
heater details.

TDO

OR
4.20.2 Opens on rising temperature
o-r-CT
V TEC L See Notes 4.21A and
See Note 4.16A
OR
4.21.7 Application: with operating
4.16.4 Closed switch with time-delay temperatures indicated
closing ( T D C ) feature

TDC 4.21 Thermostat See Notes 4.21A and


OR
NOTE 4.21A: The t symbol shall be shown
or be replaced by data giving the nominal or 4.22 Flasher
specific operating temperature of the device. Self-Interrupting Switch

NOTE 4.21B: If clarification of direction of


See Note 4.16A contact operation is needed, a directional arrow
may be added. The arrowhead shall point in
4.17 Flow-Actuated Switch the direction of rising temperature operation.
A directional arrow shall always be shown for
central-off (neutral) position devices.
4.17.1 Closes on increase in flow
4.21.1 Closes on rising temperature
o
, t

See Note 4.21A

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A 3 . 1 ) . 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

33

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 4 SECTION 4
Graphic Symbols for 4.23 to
4.23 to
4.29.3 Contacts, Switches, Contactors, and Relays 4.29.3

4.23 Foot-Operated Switch 4.25.3 Switch in evacuated envelope, 4.28.2 Typical separate drive (with
Foot Switch H 1-pole double-throw terminals shown)

4.23.1 Opens b y foot pressure Show contacts as required.

OR

4.23.2 Closes b y foot pressure


o l

4.25.4 Mushroom-head safety feature 4.29 Contactor

4.24 Switch Operated by Shaft Rotation Application to 2-circuit pushbutton See also CIRCUIT BREAKER (item
switch. 9.4)
and Responsive to Speed or Direction

See also item 4.27


Fundamental symbols for contacts, coils,
4.24.1 Speed mechanical connections, etc, are the basis
O o of contactor symbols and should be used
to represent contactors on complete dia-
4.25.5 Key-operated lock switch grams. Complete diagrams of contactors
consist of combinations of fundamental
Use appropriate standard symbol and symbols for control coils, mechanical con-
add key designation or other information nections, etc, in such configurations as to
o-J-tf in note. represent the actual device. Mechanical
interlocking should be indicated by notes.
4.24.2 Plugging: to stop drive after it 4.26 Telegraph Key S
has come practically to rest
4.26.1 Simple 4.29.1 Manually operated 3-poIe con-
tactor

1 1 1

<:
4.26.2 Simple with shorting switch T-T-T

4.29.2 Electrically operated 1-pole


4.24.3 Anti-plugging: to prevent plug contactor with series blowout coil
ging of drive

o-ro"
4.26.3 Open-circuit or pole-changing

OR

o-4-O.
R
4.24.4 Centrifugal switch (opening on 4.27 Governor ] (Contact-making)
increasing speed) Speed Regulator
S e e Note 4.5A
See also symbol 14.2.6 Contacts open or closed as required
(shown here as c l o s e d ) .
O-l 0"
4.29.3 Electrically operated 3-pole
< tI > ' contactor with series blowout coils; 2
open and 1 closed auxiliary contacts
4.28 Vibrator, Interrupter F ] (shown smaller than the main contacts)
4.25 Switches with Specific Features
4.28.1 Typical shunt drive (with ter
4.25.1 Hook switch 3

^
minals shown)
1 i
Show contacts as required.
TTTTT

4.25.2 Telephone dial F ] (switch)

i 1
J i TTTTT It

TYPICAL * See Note 4.5A

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information ( n o t e especially A 3 . 1 ) . 2 . Symbols for single-line ( o n e - l i n e ) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, a n d symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each c o l u m n .

34

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 4 SECTION 4
Graphic Symbols for
4.29.4 to 4.29.4 to
4.30.6 Contacts, Switches, Contactors, and Relays 4.30.6

4.29.4 Electrically operated 1-pole that a voltage applied with the polarity 4.30.5.2 With normally open contacts
contactor with shunt blowout coil as indicated shall cause the armature to shown

dp pj
move toward the contact shown nearer
the coil on the diagram. If the relay is m
equipped with numbered terminals, the
proper terminal numbers shall also be OR
shown.

OK 4.30.1 Basic

4.30.5.3 With transfer contacts shown

4.30.2 Application: relay with transfer


contacts TEC
* See Note 4.5A
4.30.6 Thermal relay, one-time type,
4.30 Relay not reusable

See OPERATING COIL; RELAY COIL OR Normally open contact type shown.
(item 4.5)

Fundamental symbols for contacts, me


chanical connections, coils, etc, are the
basis of relay symbols and should be used
to represent relays on complete diagrams.

The following letter combinations or


symbol elements may be used with relay
symbols. The requisite number of these OR Cross References
letters or symbol elements may be used
to show what special features a relay pos Protective Relay (item 9.5)
sesses.

The terms "slow" and "fast" are relative,


and the degree is not to be noted by a * See Note 4.5A
multiplicity of the same relay symbol on
4.30.3 Application: polarized relay
a diagram. Relays that are direct-current
operated are not marked to indicate dc with transfer contacts
operation.

TEC | AC Alternating-current or
ringing relay
OR
D Differential
DB Double-biased (biased
in both directions)
DP Dashpot
EP Electrically polarized
4.30.4 Application: polarized (no bias)
FO Fast-operate
marginal relay with transfer contacts
FR Fast-release
L Latching
MG Marginal ]C+|NB| | M G |
M L Magnetic-latching (re
manent )
6
+11-
NB No bias 4.30.5 Relay, thermally operated
NR Nonreactive
4.30.5.1 Activating device for ther
l+l I Magnetically polarized
mally operated relay
using biasing spring,
or having magnet bias Time of delay may be shown.
SA Slow-operate and slow-
Contacts may be shown separately from
r d ess &
the operating device.
W XI I SO Slow-operate
IIIIII I SR Slow-release See also item 2.14
SW Sandwich-wound to
improve balance to
longitudinal currents

The proper poling for a polarized re-


lay shall be shown by the use of + and
designations applied to the winding
leads. The interpretation of this shall be

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

35
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 5 SECTION 5
5.1 to
Graphic Symbols for 5.1 to
5.3.5.3 Terminals and Connectors 5.3.5.3

5.1 Terminals The rigid-terminal symbol is used to indi 5.3.3.1 Commonly used for a jack or
cate customary rigid terminals (caps, receptacle (usually stationary)
5.1.1 Circuit terminal
rods, rings, etc) as well as to indicate: See Note 5.3.3A
TEC O
(1) Any metallic envelope or external OR
5.1.1.1 Terminal board or terminal conductive coating or casing that has a

D
< IEC
strip, with 4 terminals shown; group of 4 contact area (as in cathode-ray tubes,
terminals disc-seal tubes, pencil tubes, etc).
(2) Mounting flange or stud when it 5.3.3.2 Commonly used for a plug
Number and arrangement as convenient.
serves as a terminal. (usually movable)
NOTE 5.1.1.1A: Internal lines and terminals
may be omitted if terminal identifications are 5.1.2.3 Device with base-orientation See Note 5.3.3A
shown within the symbol.


key OR

KEY -
See Note 5.1.2A 5.3.4 Separable connectors (engaged)
OR 5.1.2.4 Devices with reference point
(such as a boss, colored dot, index pin, See Note 5.3.3A
O OR
index tab, or bayonet pin)

CD
o
o
o
See Note 5.1.1.1 A
5.3.4.1 Application: engaged 4-con-
5.1.2 Terminals for electron tubes, ductor connectors; the plug has 1 male
semiconductor devices, etc 5.1.2.5 Terminals connected to metallic and 3 female contacts w
Used primarily in application-data termi envelope or enclosure
-T-*> r

nal diagrams for electron tubes, semi


conductor devices, and other devices hav
_ I I
ing terminations of similar type.
_LI I

NOTE 5.I.2A: Explanatory words and arrows


are not part of the symbol.
5.2 Cable Termination
NOTE 5.1.2B: The following letter combina
tions, if shown adjacent to terminal symbols re Line shown on left of symbol indicates
quiring special attention, shall signify the follow cable.
ing:
S Connection to an external shield integral 5.3.4.2 Application: engaged 4-con-
with a device (including metal tube shell,
base sleeve or shell; external conductive ductor connectors; the plug has 1 male
coating or casing). Not to be used if the 4 and 3 female contacts with individual
external conductive coating serves as one contact designations shown in the com
side of a capacitor (as in cathode-ray plete-symbol column ^ ^
tubes) and is not designed to function as 5.3 Connector
an electrostatic shield.
IC Terminal not intended to be used for circuit Disconnecting Device TEC
connection. Jack F ]
IS Internal shield not depicted in terminal Plug -1<D*J-
diagram.
The contact symbol is not an arrowhead. OR
5.1.2.1 Base-pin terminals (electron It is larger and the lines are drawn at a
tubes, etc); pin terminals (semiconductor 90-degree angle.
< A
devices, etc)
5.3.1 Female contact C
D
<
5.3.5 Communication switchboard-type
ENVELOPE OR 5.3.2 Male contact
ENCLOSURE connector

5.3.5.1 2-conductor (jack)


5.3.3 Connector assembly, movable or V ^
See Note 5.1.2A stationary portion; jack, plug, or recepta 5.3.5.2 2-conductor (plug)
cle
5.1.2.2 Envelope terminals
NOTE 5.3.3A: Use appropriate number of con
RIGID tact symbols.
5.3.5.3 3-conductor (jack) with 2
TERMINAL
break contacts (normals) and 1 auxiliary
make contact ^
See Note 5.3.3A

FLEXIBLE 5 v
LEAD
See Note 5.1.2A

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

36
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 5 SECTION 5
Graphic Symbols for
5.3.5.4 5.3.5.4
5.7.5 Terminals and Connectors 5.7.5

5.3.5.4 3-conductor (plug) 5.4.1 Male contact 5.6 Coaxial Connector


Coaxial Junction
Filled outline, approximating contact
end-view ( 3 typical forms are shown) 5.6.1 Engaged coaxial connectors
^ Coaxial recognition symbol may be added
5.3.6 Communication switchboard-type 5.4.2 Female contact if necessary. See COAXIAL TRANSMIS
connector with circuit normalled through SION PATH (item 3.1.9)
Open outline, approximating limiting
"Normalled" indicates that a through cir
shape of mating male contact ( 3 typical fjc
cuit may be interrupted by an inserted
connector. As shown here, the inserted forms are shown)
connector opens the through circuit and 5.6.2 Coaxial with the outside conduc
connects to the circuit towards the left. tor shown carried through
5.4.3 Application: 2-conductor nonpo
Items 5.3.6.1 through 5.3.6.4 show 2-con- larized connector with male contacts (3 _ Q i i Q
ductor jacks. The "normal" symbol is ap typical forms are shown)
plicable to other types of connectors.

< 5.6.3 Application: coaxial with center


5.3.6.1 Jacks with circuit normalled conductor shown carried through; with
through one way outside conductor terminated on chassis
Oyv


5.4.4 Application: 2-conductor nonpo
larized connector with female contacts ( 3 IEC I
O-ps typical forms are shown)
5.3.6.2 Jacks with circuit normalled
5.6.4 Application: coaxial with center
through both ways
conductor shown carried through; outside
conductor not carried through
< ) 5.4.5 Application: 2-conductor polar ---
ized connector ( 2 typical forms with fe --
male contacts are shown) L
--
5.3.6.3 Jacks in multiple, one set with
circuit normalled through both ways
5.6.5 Application: or Y adapter with
outer conductor carried through

OJhTT <
J_
5.4.6 Application: 3-conductor polar
ized connector ( 5 typical forms with fe
male contacts are shown)
A
5.7 Waveguide Flanges
Waveguide Junction

5.7.1 Mated pair of symmetrical wave


guide connectors
5.3.6.4 Jacks with auxiliary contacts,
with circuit normalled through both ways

3
5.7.2. Mated pair of asymmetrical
5.4.7 Application: 4-conductor polar waveguide connectors
ized connector ( 2 typical forms with fe The line is not interrupted at the junction
male contacts are shown) whether or not it is a plain-type or
choke-type connection.

5.4 Connectors of the Type Commonly



Used for Power-Supply Purposes (con 5.7.3 Plain (rectangular waveguide)
venience outlets and mating connectors).
American National Standard Dimensions 5.5 Test Block m -B->
of Caps, Plugs, and Receptacles, ANSI 5.5.1 Female portion with short-cir 5.7.4 Choke (rectangular waveguide)
C73.10-1966 through C73.68-1966).

c
cuiting bar (with terminals shown)
See also symbols 5.3.3.1 and 5.3.3.2 m -fK
The following symbols are primarily for 5.7.5 Application: rectangular wave
applications where the type of connector guide with mated plain and choke flanges
must be indicated semipictorially. with direct-current isolation (insulation)
5.5.2 Male portion (with terminals between sections of waveguide
Contacts and contact arrangements shall shown)
be shown in simplified form as viewed
from the mating face, approximately in
proportion to the arrangement in the
physical item. A simplified-shape outline
shall surround the contact symbols. Cross References

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

37
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 6 SECTION 6
Graphic Symbols for 6.1 to
6.1 to
6.3.5 Transformers, Inductors, and Windings 6.3.5

6.1 Core 6.2.2 Magnetic-core inductor 6.3.1 Transductor element, assembled


Telephone loading coil
6.1.1 General or air core When windings are separated on a draw
If necessary to show a magnetic core. ing, suitable indication shall be provided
If it is necessary to identify an air core, a to show that they are on the same core.
note should appear adjacent to the sym f----
bol of the inductor or transformer
6.2.3 Tapped
NO SYMBOL
m T T
6.3.2 Application: single-phase series
6.1.2 Magnetic core of inductor or
transformer 6.2.4 Adjustable inductor transductor with winding-polarity and
kind-of-current markings shown
Not to be used unless it is necessary to IEC
NOTE 6.3.2A: An increase of current enter
identify a magnetic core. ing the end of the control winding marked
with a dot causes an increase in the power
6.2.5 Adjustable or continuously ad output.
justable inductor
6.1.3 Core of magnet

For use if representation of the core is


necessary. See PERMANENT MAGNET
(item 2.8)
6.2.6 Shunt inductor See Notes 6.3B and C
L"
6.3.3 Application: single-phase parallel
6.1.4 Magnetic-memory core transductor with winding-polarity and
kind-of-current markings shown
Commonly used in magnetic-memory and
magnetic channel-selector devices.
6.2.7 Inductive termination
See also item 15.18.
Commonly used in coaxial and wave
6.1.4.1 Single-aperture type with guide diagrams.
windings shown
6.2.7.1 Application: series inductor and
path open
See Notes 6.3B, 6.3C, and 6.3.2A

6.3.4 Application: self-exciting trans


6.1.4.2 Application: in an array having 6.2.7.2 Application: series inductor and ductor with two control circuits and
four windingstwo WRITE-READ wind path short-circuited kind-of-current markings shown
ings, one INHIBIT winding, and one
SENSE winding

NOTE 6.1.4.2A: Words are for explanation 6.2.8 Application: carrier line trap
and are not part of the symbol.
NOTE 6.2.8A: The asterisk is not part of
the symbol. The symbol represents a general
WRITE trap or single-frequency trap unless one of the
SENSE following letter combinations is used:
INHIBIT
WRITE READ 2f Two-frequency
WB Wide-band

--
READ
See Note 6.1.4.2A See Note 6.3B

6.2 Inductor 6.3.5 Application: transductor with di


Winding (machine or transformer) rect-current output and kind-of-current
* See Note 6.2.8A
Reactor markings shown
Radio-Frequency Coil
6.3 Transductor
Telephone Retardation Coil
Saturable-Core Inductor
Saturable-Core Reactor
See also OPERATING COIL (item 4.5)
NOTE 6.3A: If essential for clarity, the
6.2.1 General magnetic core symbol, 6.1.2, may be added
where applicable.
Either symbol may be used in the follow NOTE 6.3B: Power windings are drawn with
ing items. three scallops or loops, control windings with
five.
fEc n n m O R < NOTE 6.3C: The saturable-properties indica
tor, symbol 1.2.4, may also be used to indicate
two or more windings. See Note 6.3B

NOTES; 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

38
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 6 SECTION 6
Graphic Symbols for 6.4 to
6.4 to
6.4.15.1 Transformers, Inductors, and Windings 6.4.15.1

6.4 Transformer 6.4.3 Saturating transformer 6.4.11 Load-ratio control transformer


Telephone Induction Coil with taps
Telephone Repeating Coil See SATURABLE-PROPERTIES
INDICATOR (symbol 1.2.4)
6.4.1 General

Either winding symbol may be used.


In the following items, the left symbol is
used.
6.4.12 1-phase induction voltage regu
lators)
Additional windings may be shown or in
dicated by a note.
Number of regulators may be written ad
jacent to the symbol.
For polarity markings on current and po
tential transformers, see symbol 1.6.3.

In coaxial and waveguide circuits, this OR


symbol represents a taper or step trans
former without mode change.
OR

IEC OR
i Q00 J
6.4.4 One winding with adjustable in
ductance

6.4.1.1 Application: transformer with 6.4.13 Triplex induction voltage regu
direct-current connections and mode sup lator
pression between two rectangular wave
guides
6.4.5 Each winding with separately ad
justable inductance

6.4.14 3-phase induction voltage regu


lator

6.4.6 Adjustable mutual inductor; con


6.4.2 Magnetic-core transformer stant-current transformer

If necessary to show a magnetic core.

6.4.2.1 Nonsaturating

6.4.7 With taps, 1-phase

6.4.15 1-phase, 2-winding transformer


6.4.2.2 Application: shielded trans
former with magnetic core shown
6.4.8 Autotvansformer, 1-phase


6.4.15.1 Application: 3-phase bank of
1-phase, 2-winding transformers
I I


6.4.9 Adjustable

6.4.2.3 Application: transformer with


magnetic core shown and with an elec
trostatic shield between windings. The
shield is shown connected to the frame.
6.4.10 Step-voltage regulator or load- IEC
ratio control autotransformer

X
NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially 3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

39
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 6 SECTION 6
Graphic Symbols for 6.4.16 to
6.4.16 to
6.5 Transformers, Inductors, and Windings 6.5

6.4.16 Polyphase transformer 6.4.20 Potential transformer(s)

OR
3Hc

OR
3f 3c 3c
6.4.17 1-phase, 3-winding transformer

6.4.21 Outdoor metering device

OR
SHOW A C T U A L
CONNECTION
INSIDE BORDER

IEC IEC

6.5 Linear Coupler

6.4.18 Current transformer (s)

Avoid conflict with symbol 3.2.5 if used u -

on the same diagram.

IEC

Cross References

OR ige m
2

OR IEC
3

6.4.19 i Bushing-type current trans


former

X The broken line indicates where line


connection to a symbol is made and is not part
of the symbol.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

40
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 7
SECTION 7 Graphic Symbols for 7.1 to
7.1 to 7.2.2
7.2.2
Electron Tubes and Related Devices

7.1.2.2 Deflecting electrodes (used in 7.1.6 Shield


7.1 Electron Tube
pairs); reflecting or repelling electrode
(used in velocity-modulated tubes) See symbol 7.2.10
See also E N V E L O P E ; E N C L O S U R E
(item LIO) and T E R M I N A L S F O R
TEC < This is understood to shield against elec
ELECTRON TUBES, S E M I C O N D U C
tric fields unless otherwise noted.
TOR DEVICES, E T C (item 5.1.2)
7.1.2.3 Ignitor (in pool tubes) (should
extend into p o o l ) ; starter ( i n gas tubes) 7.1.6.1 Any shield against electric
Tube-component symbols are shown first. fields that is within the envelope and that
These are followed b y typical applica
IKT y i connected to an independent terminal
tions showing the use of these specific
symbols in the various classes of devices
7.1.2.4 Excitor (contactor type)
such as thermionic, cold-cathode, and
photoemissive tubes of varying structures 1
and combinations of elements (triodes,
cathode-ray tubes, e t c ) . 7.1.3 Collecting electrode

Lines outside of the envelope are not part 7.1.3.1 Anode or plate
7.1.6.2 Outside envelope of x-ray tube
of the symbol but are electrical connec
tions thereto. TEC I

Connections between the external circuit 7.1.3.2 Target or x-ray anode


IEC I
and electron-tube symbols within the en
velope may b e located as required to sim
Drawn at about a 45-degree angle.
plify the diagram.

7.1.1 Emitting electrode TfX- 7 . 1 . 7 . Coupling

7.1.1.1 Directly heated (filamentary) See C O U P L I N G (item 1 5 . 2 ) , C O A X I A L


7 . 1 . 3 . 3 Fluorescent target
cathode T R A N S M I S S I O N P A T H (item 3 . 1 . 9 ) ,
Drawn at about a 45-degree angle. and W A V E G U I D E (item 3 . 6 )
NOTE 7.1.1.1A: Leads may be connected in
any convenient manner to ends of the / \ pro
vided the identity of the is retained. 7.1.7.1 Coupling b y loop (electromag

uc y netic type)

7.1.3.4 Collector Coupling loop m a y be shown inside or


See Note 7.1.1.1A
outside envelope as desired.

7.1.1.2 Indirectly heated cathode X


Lead may be connected to either ex 7.1.4 Collecting and emitting electrode 7.1.8J Ion-diffusion barrier, shown
treme end of the 1 or, if required,
with envelope
to both ends, in any convenient manner. 7.1.4.1 D y n o d e
Commonly used with liquid-filled tubes.
Tic
k
1
TEC
7.1.1.3 Cold cathode (including ioni-
cally heated cathode) 7.1.4.2 Alternately collecting and
emitting electrode
TEC o
7.1.4.2.1 Composite anode-photocath-
7.1.1.4 Photocathode ode
TEC C EC _l 7.2 General Notes

7.1.1.5 Pool cathode 7.2.1 If new symbols are necessary,


7.1.4.2.2 Composite anode-cold cath they should be formed where possible
ode from component symbols. For example,
IEC
see D Y N O D E (item 7.1.4.1), which

7.1.1.6 Ionically heated cathode with


4 combines the anode and photocathode
conventions.
provision for supplementary heating
7.1.4.2.3 Composite anode-ionically 7.2.2 A connection to anode, dynode,
heated cathode with provision for supple pool cathode, photocathode, deflecting
He J*\ mentary heating electrode, composite anode-photocathode,
See Note 7.1.1.1A and composite anode-cold cathode shall
IEC X be to the center of that symbol. Connec
7.1.2 Controlling electrode tion to any other electrode may be shown
See Note 7.1.1.1A
7.1.2.1 Grid (including beam-confining at either end or both ends of the elec
or beam-forming electrodes) trode symbol.
7.1.5 Heater

TEC
TEC t The broken line - indicates where line
connection to a symbol is made and is not part
See Note 7.1.1.1A of the symbol.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

41

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 7 SECTION 7
Graphic Symbols for 7.2.3 to
7.2.3 to
7.3.7.3 Electron Tubes and Related Devices 7.3.7.3

7.2.3 A diagram for a tube having 7.3 Typical Applications 7.3.6.1 With electric-field (electro
more than one heater or filament shall 7.3.1 Triode with directly heated fila static) deflection
show only one heater or filament symbol mentary cathode and envelope connec
/s unless they have entirely separate tion to base terminal
connections. If a heater or filament tap is
made, either brought out to a terminal or
internally connected to another element,

""
it shall be connected at the vertex of the
symbol, regardless of the actual division
of voltage across the heater or filament.

7.2.4 Standard symbols, such as the in


clined arrow for tunability and connect 7.3.6.2 For electromagnetic deflection
7.3.2 Equipotential-cathode pentode
ing dotted lines for ganged components,
showing use of elongated envelope
may be added to a tube symbol to extend 7.3.6.2.1 Single-gun
the meaning of the tube symbol, pro
vided such added feature or component
is integral with the tube.

7.2.5 Electric components, such as re


sistors, capacitors, or inductors, which are
integral parts of the tube and are impor
tant to its functional operation, shall be 7.3.3 Equipotential-cathode twin triode
shown in the standard manner. showing use of elongated envelope and
rule of item 7.2.3
7.2.6 Multiple equipotential cathodes 7.3.6.2.2 Multiple-gun (three-gun
that are directly connected inside the shown)
tube shall be shown as a single cathode.

7.2.7 A tube having two or more grids


tied internally shall be shown with sym
bols for each grid, except when the grids
are adjacent in the tube structure. Thus, 7.3.4 Cold-cathode gas-filled tube
the diagram for a twin pentode having a 7.3.4.1 Rectifier; voltage regulator for
common screen-grid connection for each direct-current operation
section and for a converter tube having
the No. 3 and No. 5 grids connected in See also symbol 11.1.3.2
ternally would show separate symbols for
each grid. A triode where the control
grid is physically in the form of two grid
windings, however, would show only one
grid. 7.3.7 Mercury-pool tube

7.2.8 A tube having a grid adjacent to 7.3.5 Phototube 7.3.7.1 With ignitor and control grid
a plate but internally connected to the 7.3.5.1 Single-unit, vacuum-type
plate to form a portion of it shall be
shown as having a plate only.

7.2.9 Associated parts of a circuit, such


as focusing coils, deflecting coils, field
coils, etc, are not part of the tube symbol
but may be added to the circuit in the 7.3.5.2 Multiplier-type 7.3.7.2 With excitor, control grid, and
form of standard symbols. For example, a holding anode
resonant-type magnetron with permanent
magnet may be shown as follows (see
symbol 15.11.1):

7.3.6 Cathode-ray tube


See Note 1.10A
7.3.7.3 Single-anode pool-type vapor
rectifier with ignitor
7.2.10 External and internal shields,
whether integral parts of tubes or not,
shall be omitted from the circuit diagram
unless the circuit diagram requires their
inclusion.

7.2.11 In line with standard drafting


practice, straight-line crossovers are rec
ommended.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are entered in each column.

42
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 7 SECTION 7
Graphic Symbols for 7.3.7.4 to
7.3.7.4 to
7.7.2 Electron Tubes and Related Devices 7.7.2

7.3.7.4 6-anocle metallic-tank pool-type 7.3.8.5 With multiple accelerating 7.5 Coulomb Accumulator
vapor rectifier with excitor, showing rigid- electrode electrostatically and electro- Electrochemical Step-Function
terminal symbol for control connection magnetically focused Device
to tank (pool cathode is insulated from
tank) See item 7.2.9 NOTE 7.5A: Letters are not part of the sym-
bol, but are for explanation only. For a pre-
charged cell, with -f- polarity applied to P, the
Anode symbols are located as conve- cell internal resistance and voltage drop will re-
nient. main low until the designed coulomb quantity
has passed; then the internal resistance will rise
to its high value.

7.3.7.5 Pool-type cathode power recti-


fier

7.3.9 Thyratron See Note 7.5A

See also symbol 8.11 7.6 Conductivity Cell

~yr
7.3.9.1 W i t h indirectly heated cathode

7.3.8 X-ray tube

7.3.8.1 With filamentary cathode and


focusing grid ( c u p )
7.7 Nuclear-Radiation Detector
The anode may be cooled by fluid or ra- (gas-filled)
diation. Ionization Chamber
Proportional Counter Tube
7.4 Solion Geiger-Mller Counter Tube
Ion-Diffusion Device
NOTE 7.7A: For other types of radiation-sen-
7.4.1 D i o d e solion sitivity indicators, see item 1.3.

7.7.1 General

7.3.8.2 With control grid, filamentary


cathode, and focusing cup

See Note 7.7A

7.7.2 Application: metal enclosure,


7.3.8.3 With grounded electrostatic
7.4.2 Tetrode solion having one collector connected to the en-
shield
closure
NOTE 7.4.2A: Letters are not part of the
symbol.
I Input
S Shield
R Readout
C Common

7.3.8.4 Double focus with rotating an-


ode See Note 7.7A

See item 7.2.9

Cross References
- o "
I Et' v
y
Magnetron (item 15.11)

Resonator (cavity-type) Tube


See Note 7.4.2A (item 15.10)

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

43
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 8 SECTION 8
8.1 to
Graphic Symbols for 8.1 to
8.2.7,3 Semiconductor Devices 8.2.7.3

8.1 Semiconductor Device See, for example, symbol 8.6 8.2.4.2 emitter on region
Transistor
Diode TEC ^
The equilateral (-W ) -
triangle shall be
filled and shall touch the semiconductor
See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction base-region symbol, I E C 8.2.4.2.1 Plurality of emitters on
region
NOTE 8.1A: Some semiconductor devices may
be represented by either of two methods.
For convenience in referring to semiconductor
symbols in this section, they are classified as fol
lows (Symbols not otherwise identified are
Style 1 ) :
Style 1 symbols are composed of basic element
NOTE 8.2.2A: The triangle points in the di
rection of the forward (easy) current as indi
cated by a direct-current ammeter, unless other
wise noted adjacent to the symbol. Electron flow
is in the opposite direction.
y
8.2.5 Collector on region of dissimilar-
conductivity type
symbols depicting the internal buildup of the de 8.2.2.1 region on region
vice. As shown, the slant line represents the
Style 2 symbols (primarily diode devices) in
corporate special-property symbols into the collector.
basic-element symbol, rather than by showing (N)
the special-property symbol adjacent to the Style Collector element symbols shall be drawn
1 symbols. OR
Style 3 symbols are composed of symbol ele at an angle of approximately 60 degrees
ments representing functions of the device with to the semiconductor base-region symbol.
out regard to the method by which the function
is performed within the device.

NOTE 8.IB: Numbers and letters in paren


8.2.2.2 region on region
(N)
J
theses are to correlate illustrations in the stan () ^ 8.2.5.1 Plurality of collectors on region
dard and are not intended to represent terminal of dissimilar-conductivity type
identification. (P)

NOTE 8.1C: In general, the angle at which a


lead is brought to a symbol element has no sig
nificance, i e c
NOTE 8.ID: Orientation, including a mirror- (P)
8.2.6 Transition between regions of
image presentation, does not change the meaning
of a symbol. I E C ' For exceptions to this rule, 8.2.3 Enhancement-type semiconductor dissimilar-conductivity types, either to
see item 8.3. region with plurality of ohmic connec or to P.
NOTE 8.IE: The elements of the symbol must tions and a rectifying junction
be drawn in such an order as to show clearly the The short slant line indicates point of
operating function of the device. I E C See symbol 8.6.10.5 change along the horizontal line from
to or to P. No connections shall be
Portions of the interrupted channel line made to the short slant line. ii-C
8.2 Element Symbols
having ohmic contacts shall be of equal
length and drawn significantly longer Transition-line element symbols shall be
8.2.1 Semiconductor region with one
ohmic connection than the center-channel section. Channel drawn at an angle of approximately 60
gaps shall be of equal length and approx degrees to the semiconductor base-region
As shown, the horizontal line is the semi imately equal to the center-channel symbol. T E C
conductor region and the vertical line is length.
The short lines used in transition symbols
an ohmic connection.
shall be appreciably shorter than collec
The line representing the ohmic connec tor or emitter symbols. UkC
tion shall not be drawn at the very end of
the line representing the semiconductor
8.2.4 Emitter on region of dissimilar-
region.
conductivity type 8.2.7 Intrinsic region between 2 re
gions
As shown, the slant line with arrow repre
8.2.1.1 Semiconductor region with a sents the emitter. Arrowheads on both The intrinsic region lies between the
plurality of ohmic connections the and emitter symbols shall be half linked slant lines. <
the length of the arrow away from the
Examples show 2 ohmic connections. semiconductor base region. T E C 8.2.7.1 Between regions of dissimilar-
conductivity type, either PIN or NIP
Emitter element symbols shall be drawn
at an angle of approximately 60 degrees TEC L~L
to the semiconductor base-region symbol.
OR 8.2.7.2 Between regions of similar-con
TEC
ductivity type, either PIP or NIN
8.2.4.1 emitter on region TEC L
TEC ^
He "I [" 8.2.7.3 Between a collector and a re-
gion of dissimilar-conductivity type, ei-
8.2.2 Rectifying junction or junction 8.2.4.1.1 Plurality of emitters on ther PIN or NIP
which influences a depletion layer region

y
The connection to the collector is made
Arrowheads ) shall be half the length to the long slant line, I E C
of the arrow away from the semiconduc
tor base region. T E C
1; _d
NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3-1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

44

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 8 SECTION 8
Graphic Symbols for 8.2.7.4 to
8.2.7.4 to
8.5.3 Semiconductor Devices 8.5.3

8.2.7.4 Between a collector and a re 8.2.9.2 Gate (no external connection) 8.4.1 PNP transistor (example of a
gion of similar conductivity type, either three-element device)
PIP or NIN For application, see symbol 8.5.9
ACTUAL DEVICE
Because there is no external connection
The connection to the collector is made (E) -(C)
to the gate, this lead shall not extend to
to the long slant line. He the envelope symbol, if any.
(B)
Style 3 / Construction of symbol by successively
See Note 8.2.9A using symbols 8.2.4.1, 8.2.5, and 8.2.1.
8.2.8 Insulated gate
8.3 Special-Property Indicators ( E ,
o o < c )

The L-shaped insulated-gate element shall IEC \ N /


See Note 8.1 A
be drawn with one side spaced from, and
parallel to, the channel between ohmic See also item 1.2 (B)
contacts. The corner of the gate element
shall be drawn opposite the preferred- If necessary, a special function or prop 8.4.2 PNINIP device (example of a
source ohmic contact. erty essential for circuit operation shall complex device with multiple emitters
be indicated ( a ) by a supplementary and bases)
8.2.8.1 One gate symbol placed within the envelope or ad
jacent to the symbol, as shown in Style 1 ACTUAL DEVICE
For an application, see symbol 8.6.10.2 symbols, or ( b ) included as part of the (4) (1) (5) (2) (6) (9)
symbol, as shown in Style 2 symbols in
item 8.5. ,1 1 1, , ,1,
J The orientation of the Style 1 special-
8.2.8.2 Multiple gate ( 2 gates shown) property indicators with respect to the
(7) (8) (3)
basic symbol is . See the applica
For an application, see symbol 8.6.10.4.1 tions in item 8.5. Construction of symbol by successively
8.3.1 Breakdown using symbols 8.2.4.1.1, 8.2.7.2., 8.2.7.3,
Insulated-gate elements are drawn as and 8.2.1.1.
long as necessary to show each gate. Do not rotate or show in mirror-image
form. (1) (2)
The insulated-gate element drawn oppo
site the preferred source is designated as Style 1 TEC XX " &* ft
the primary gate. Additional gates are
secondary gates. 8.3.2 Tunneling (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

J Style 1 IEC ]
8.5 Typical Applications, Two-Terminal
_l Devices
8.3.3 Backward
8.2.9 Gate; control electrode See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction
Style 1 IEC [
See Note 8.4A
Applicable only to Style 3 symbols. 8.3.4 Capacitive
8.5.1 Semiconductor diode; semicon
Style 1 -ir- ductor rectifier diode; metallic rectifier
NOTE 8.2.9A: The gate symbol shall be
drawn at an angle of approximately 30 to the
axis of the basic diode symbol, and shall touch 8.4 Rules for Drawing Style 1 Symbols
the cathode (or anode) symbol at a point approx TEC <*> !<>
imately halfway between the center line of the To draw a device symbol, start at an
symbol and the extremity of the cathode (or electrode whose polarity is known (usu OR
anode) symbol.
ally an emitter) and proceed along the
device, showing all of its regions individ IEC
8.2.9.1 Gate (external connection) ually. Finally, indicate ohmic connections
where required. OR
8.2.9.1.1 General
NOTE 8.4A: Numbers, letters, and words in
parentheses are to correlate illustrations in the
For application, see symbol 8.6.12.1 standard; they are not intended to represent de
vice terminal numbering or identification and
Style 3 J are not part of the symbol as shown in items 8.5.2 Capacitive diode (varactor)
8.5, 8.6, 8.10, and 8.11.
See Note 8.2.9A Name of Terminal Letter
Anode A Style 1 IEC 1 j|
Base
8.2.9.1.2 Having turn-off feature Collector C
Drain D
For application, see symbol 8.2.12.2 Emitter
Gate G Style 2
Cathode
This special feature shall be indicated by Source S
a short line crossing the gate lead. Main terminal* 8.5.3 Temperature-dependent diode
Bulk (substrate) U

Style 3 J Used with bidirectional thyristors. The ter


minals are differentiated by numerical subscripts
1 and 2, T being the terminal to which the
1

See Note 8.2.9A gate trigger signal is referenced, if applicable.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, synbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

45

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 8 SECTION 8
8.5.4
Graphic Symbols for 8.5.4 to
8.6.1.1 Semiconductor Devices 8.6.1.1

8.5.4 Photodiode 8.5.6.4.1 NPN-type 8.5.8.2 Light-activated type

See item 1.3


()/\<T)
8.5.4.1 Photosensitive type (A) (K)
Style 1 JET

8.5.6.4.2 PNP-type OR

(T)^N.(T)
8.5.4.2 Photoemissive type

(K)
8.5.7 Tunnel and backward diodes
8.5.5 Storage diode
8.5.7.1 Tunnel diode
Style 3 (K)
For this application, Note 8.2.2A does
not apply.
8.5.6 Breakdown diode; overvoltage
8.5.9 Thyristor, bidirectional diode
absorber Style 1
] type; bi-switch
See also item 9.3
OR See also symbol 8.6.15
8.5.6.1 Unidirectional diode; voltage
regulator
<T)(5\)|
Style 1
8.5.10 Phototransistor
( N P N - t y p e ) (without external base-re
OR Style 2
gion connection)

See also symbol 8.6.16


8.5.7.2 Backward diode; tunnel recti
fier

For this application, Note 8.2.2A does "


Style 2
@ not apply.

Style 1 ^ r- 8.5.11 Current regulator

OR
8.5.6.2 Bidirectional diode (A) [ (K)

4+
8.6 Typical Applications, Three- (or
Style 1
^ VJ more) Terminal Devices

8.6.1 PNP transistor (also PNIP tran


Style 2
sistor, if omitting the intrinsic region will
not result in ambiguity)
Style 2 8.5.8 Thyristor, reverse-blocking diode-
type See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction

^ {O)
8.5.6.3 Unidirectional negative-resis 8.5.8.1 General
(E)/~\(C)
tance breakdown diode; trigger diac
(A)^-^(K)
8.5.6.3.1 NPN-type Style 1
(B)
(K)/-MA)
8.6.1.1 Application: PNP transistor
^ (W) (A)
with one electrode connected to envelope
(in this case, the collector electrode)

8.5.6.3.2 PNP-type

Q Q
(K)
( E ) ^ (C)
(A)
/"~"\< >
K

Style 3 ( A ) ^ ^ ( K ) (B)
8.5.6.4 Bidirectional negative resis
tance breakdown diode; trigger diac

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A 3 . 1 ) . 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

46
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 8 SECTION 8
8.6.2 to
Graphic Symbols for 8.6.2 to
8.6.11.5 Semiconductor Devices 8.6.11.5

8.6.2 NPN transistor (also NPIN tran 8.6.8 Unijunction transistor with N- 8.6.10.5 N-channel insulated-gate, en
sistor, if omitting the intrinsic region will type base hancement-type, single-gate, active-bulk
not result in ambiguity) (substrate) externally terminated, four-
See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction terminal device
See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction
_ /iTV>

y
(E) (C)
IEC ( I >-l(U)
(Bl)
(G)\Jj-y(s)
8.6.10.5.1 Application: N-channel in
8.6.9 Unijunction transistor with P- sulated-gate, enhancement-type, two-gate,
()
type base five-terminal device
8.6.3 NPN transistor with transverse-
biased base See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction

See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction


_
'/< 2)

8.6.11 Field-effect transistor with P-


(B2)
(El^-rVC) channel (junction gate and insulated
gate)
8.6.10 Field-effect transistor with N- 8.6.11.1 P-channel junction gate
(Bl) channel (junction gate and insulated
gate) See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction

Q
OR
(E!^^NC) 8.6.10.1 N-channel junction gate i(0)
(G)
If desired, the junction-gate symbol ele As)
ment may be drawn opposite the pre
ferred source. OR
(Bl) ( 8 2 )
,(D)
8.6.4 PNIP transistor with ohmic con-
See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction
nection to the intrinsic region
(gjV^I-tAs)
i(0)
See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 8.6.11.2 P-channel insulated-gate, de
'(S)
pletion-type, single-gate, passive-bulk
OR (substrate), three-terminal device

ID)

(Bl)(B2) (G)\4-/iS) (G) (S)

8.6.5 NPIN transistor with ohmic con- 8.6.10.2 N-channel insulated-gate, de 8.6.11.3 P-channel insulated-gate, de
nection to the intrinsic region pletion-type, single-gate, passive-bulk pletion-type, single-gate, active-bulk
(substrate), three-terminal device (substrate) internally terminated to
See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction source, three-terminal device
(D)

(E)/\(C) (G) (S) (0)

(G) (S)
8.6.10.3 N-channel insulated-gate, de
( B l ) (B2) pletion-type, single-gate, active-bulk
8.6.11.4 P-channel insulated-gate, de
(substrate) internally terminated to
pletion-type, single-gate, active-bulk

r
8.6.6 PNIN transistor with ohmic con source, three-terminal device
(substrate) externally terminated, four-
nection to the intrinsic region terminal device

See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction (G)


(S) IEC (I f*4<u>

y
(E).(C) (G)\JJ-/(S)
8.6.10.4 N-channel insulated-gate, de
pletion-type, single-gate, active-bulk 8.6.11.4.1 Application: P-channel in
m (substrate) externally terminated, four- sulated-gate, depletion-type,
five-terminal device
two-gate,
terminal device
(Bl) ( B 2 )

8.6.7 NPIP transistor with ohmic con IEC (I Ra)


(G)\J_Uy<s) (Giivuyts)
nection to the intrinsic region
8.6.11.5 P-channel insulated-gate, en
See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction 8.6.10.4.1 Application: N-channel in hancement type, single-gate, active-bulk
sulated-gate, depletion-type, two-gate, (substrate) externally terminated, four-
(E) . J C ) five-terminal device terminal device
TEC
:o) v(D)
JJc ( G 2 )
(U) )(U)
( B D (B2) (Gl) (G)\ '(S)
(S)

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

47
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 8 SECTION 8
8.6.11.5.1 to
Graphic Symbols for 8.6.11.5.1 to
8.11.2 Semiconductor Devices 8.11.2

8.6.11.5.1 Application: P-channel - 8.6.15 Thyristor, bidirectional triode- 8.10 Photon-Coupled Isolator
sulated-gate, enhancement-type, two type; triac; gated switch
gate, five-terminal device See also symbol 15.8.1
See also symbol 8.5.9
(G2) (D) NOTE 8.10A: is the transmitter; R is the
(U) receiver. The letters are for explanation and are
(GI) (S) not part of the symbol. Explanatory information
Style 3 (T) IT) should be added to explain circuit operation.
8.6.12 Thyristor, reverse-blocking
triode-type, N-type gate; semiconductor 8.10.1 General
8.6.16 Phototransistor (NPN-type)
controlled rectifier, N-type gate
See also svmbol 8.5.10
See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction
See Note 8.10A
8.6.12.1 General <E>, ,(C)
(A) (K) 8.10.2 Complete isolator (single-pack
Style 1 IEC age type)

8.7 Photosensitive Cell


(G)
See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction
0 ^ 0
(G)
8.7.1 Asymmetrical photoconductive See Note 8.10A
Style 3 IEC (A) (K) transducer
8.10.3 Application: Incandescent lamp
USE SYMBOL 8.5.4.1 and symmetrical photoconductive trans
8.6.12.2 Gate turn-off type ducer
8.7.2 Symmetrical photoconductive

D
(G) transducer (resistive)
Style 3 ( A )
(K) USE SYMBOL 2.1.13

8.7.3 Photovoltaic transducer; barrier


8.10.4 Application: Photoemissive
8.6.13 Thyristor, reverse-blocking photocell; blocking-layer cell; solar cell
diode and phototransistor
triode-type, P-type gate; semiconductor

)
controlled rectifier, P-type gate (A)
^ ( C )

See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction

8.6.13.1 General 8.8 Semiconductor Thermocouple () (B) ()


(A) (K)
8.8.1 Temperature-measuring 8.11 Solid-State Thyratron (replacement
Style 1 IEC type)
See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction
(G) See symbol 7.3.9

(G) NOTE 8.11 A; If the thyratron replacement


has only one cathode lead, see symbol 8.6.13.1,
8.8.2 Current-measuring Style 3.
Style 3 (A) (K)

8.11.1 Balanced
8.6.13.2 Gate turn-off type (A)

8.9 Hall Element


Style 3 (A)
Hall Generator
(KI)(K2)
See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction
8.11.2 Unbalanced
8.6.14 Thyristor, reverse-blocking
tetrode-type; semiconductor controlled NOTE 8.9A: W and X are the current termi
nals; Y and are the voltage output terminals.
switch Letters are for explanation and are not part of (A)
(A) (K)
the symbol.
If polarity markings (symbol 1.6) are shown,
Style 1 IEC the direction of the magnetic field must be de
fined. (G)
(Y)
(Kl) (K2)
(G2) ( G i )

(W) (X)
(Gi)

Style 3 (A) (K) Cross References


(Z) Bridge-Type Rectifier
(G2) See Note 8.9A (item 16.3.3)

NOTES; I. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

48
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 9 SECTION 9
9.1 to Graphic Symbols for 9.1 to
9.4.4 Circuit Protectors 9.4.4

9.1 Fuse (one-time thermal current-over 9.1.5 Isolating fuse-switch for on-load 9.3.7 Valve or film element
load device) switching

9.1.1 General Ill


9.3.8 Multigap, general

9.3.9 Application: gap plus valve plus


OR ground, 2-pole
9.1.6 Temperature-sensitive fuse (am
bient-temperature operated)
1 IIIIi'
USE SYMBOL 2.12.3
HI
9.2 Current Limiter (for power cable)
The arrowheads in this case are filled.
9.4 Circuit Breaker El

OR If it is desired to show the condition


NOTE 9.2A: Use appropriate number of causing the breaker to trip, the relay pro
single-line diagram symbols.
tective-function symbols in item 9.5.1
may be used alongside the breaker sym
See Note 9.2A bol.
9.1.1.1 Fuse, supply side indicated by Avoid conflict with symbol 1.7.3 if used 9.4.1 General
a thick line on the same diagram.

9.3 Lightning Arrester


Arrester (electric surge, etc)
IEC
Gap

See also symbol 8.5.6


9.4.2 Air circuit breaker, if distinction
9.1.2 Fuse with alarm contact is needed; for alternating-current circuit
9.3.1 General
breakers rated at 1,500 volts or less and
NOTE 9.1.2A: When fuse blows, alarm bus A
is connected to power supply bus S. The letters for all direct-current circuit breakers
S (supply), L (load), and A (alarm circuit)
are for explanation only, and are not part of the
symbol. 9.3.2 Carbon block; telephone protector
block

The sides of the rectangle shall be ap

.J] See Note 9.1.2A


proximately in the ratio of 1 to 2 and the
space between rectangles shall be ap 9.4.3 Network protector
proximately equal to the width of a rec
tangle.
9.1.3 Isolating fuse-switch; high-volt
age primary fuse cutout, dry
OD-
9.3.3 Electrolytic or aluminum cell
9.4.4 Circuit breaker, other than cov
This symbol is not composed of arrow ered by symbol 9.4.1
heads.
The symbol in the right column is for a
3-pole breaker.

9.3.4 Horn gap NOTE 9.4.4A: On a power diagram, the sym


9.1.4 High-voltage primary fuse cut bol may be used without other identification. On
out, oil a composite drawing where confusion with the
general circuit element symbol (item 16.1) may
result, add the identifying letters CB inside or
adjacent to the square.
9.3.5 Protective gap

These triangles shall not be filled.

9.3.6 Sphere gap

"H < - See Note 9.4.4A

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

49
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 9 SECTION 9
9.4.5 to
Graphic Symbols for 9.4.5 to
9.5.12.20 Circuit Protectors 9.5.12.20

9.4.5 Application: 3-pole circuit breaker 9.5.5 Balance, general 9.5.12.5 Power directional
with thermal-overload device in all 3
poles W -

9.5.6 Differential, general 9.5.12.6 Balanced current

X >

9.5.7 Pilot wire, general 9.5.12.7 Differential current


m N
PW X *
OR
9.5.8 Carrier current, general 9.5.12.8 Distance

N
CC
9.5.12.9 Directional distance
9.5.9 Operating quantity
The operating quantity is indicated by
9.4.6 Application: 3-pole circuit the following letters or symbols placed ei
9.5.12.10 Overfrequency
breaker with magnetic-overload device in ther on or immediately above the relay
all 3 poles protective-function symbols shown above. F

C 'Current 9.5.12.11 Overtemperature


Distance
F Frequency
GP Gas pressure
Phase 9.5.12.12 Phase balance
W Power
S Synchronism
9.4.7 Application: 3-pole circuit Temperature
9.5.12.13 Phase sequence
breaker, drawout type V Voltage

* The use of the letter may be omitted

{ _ 11 i
t t t
in the case of current, and the absence of
such letter presupposes that the relay op
erates on current.
9.5.12.14 Pilot wire,
rent
differential-cur


4, >! -i- - X - PW
t 9.5.10 Ground relays
Relays operative on residual current only
9.5.12.15 Pilot wire, directional-com
9.5 Protective Belay parison
are so designated by attaching the ground
Fundamental symbols for contacts, coils, symbol |l' to the relay protective-
function symbol. Note that the zero PW
mechanical connections, etc, are the basis
of relay symbols and should be used to phase-sequence designation given below 9.5.12.16 Carrier pilot
represent relays on complete diagrams. may be used instead when desirable.

9.5.11 Phase-sequence quantities


A: cc
See RELAY COIL; OPERATING COIL
Operations on phase-sequence quantities 9.5.12.17 Positive phase-sequence un
(item 4.5) and RELAY (item 4.30)
may be indicated by the use of the con dervoltage
9.5.1 Relay protective functions ventional subscripts 0, 1, and 2 after the
The following symbols may be used to letter indicating the operating quantity.
indicate protective functions, or device- 9.5.12.18 Negative phase-sequence
function numbers may be placed in the 9.5.12 Applications
overcurrent
circle or adjacent to the basic symbol
(see ANSI C37.2-1962). 9.5.12.1 Overcurrent

NOTE 9.5.1A: An operating-quantity symbol 9.5.12.19 Gas-pressure (Buchholz)


must be added to the general symbols 9.5.2
. GP _
through 9.5.6 in accordance with the rules of
9.5.9. 9.5.12.2 Directional overcurrent
9.5.12.20 Out-of-step
9.5.2 Over, general
. S _
9.5.12.3 Directional residual overcur
rent

9.5.3 Under, general


> <
9.5.12.4 Undervoltage
9.5.4 Direction, general; directional Cross References
over

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

50

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 10 SECTION 10
Graphic Symbols for 10.1 to
10.1 to
10.4.3 Acoustic Devices 10.4.3

10.1 Audible-Signaling Device MG Magnetic armature 10.3.5 4-conductor handset with push-
tPM Permanent magnet with moving to-talk switch
10.1.1 Bell, electrical FJ ; telephone coil
ringer F]

NOTE 10.1.1A: If specic identification is


required, the abbreviation AC (or symbol 1.8.2) * o
or DC (or lower symbol 1.8.1) may be added
within or adjacent to the symbol.
NI 10.3.6 Operator's set
OR

-D =
10.4 Telephone Receiver
OR OR
Earphone FJ
Hearing-Aid Receiver
- =0 Note: The and t are not part of the symbol.
10.4.1 General

See Note 10.1.1A

10.1.1.1 Single-stroke
10.1.3.3 Loudspeaker-microphone;
underwater sound transducer, two-way
-a IEC

10.4.2 Headset, double


IEC Z[]

10.1.2 Buzzer F ] 10.1.4 Telegraph sounder fj 10.4.3 Headset, single

o-=]

10.2 Microphone II
9 '
See Note 10.1.1A Telephone Transmitter

10.1.3 Horn, electrical ; loudspeaker F) 10.2.1 General


I C ; siren f; underwater sound trans- Cross References
ducer (with acoustic output); sound
reproducer
Q JEC Qz:
OR OR
10.1.3.1 General

D- D=
/ 10.3 Handset FJ
Operator's Set

10.3.1 General

10.1.3.2 Application: specific types

If specific identification of loudspeaker 10.3.2 With push-to-talk switch


types is required, the following letter
combinations may be added in the sym
bol at the locations indicated by the *
and the %:

*HN Horn, electrical 10.3.3 3-conductor handset


HW Howler
*LS Loudspeaker F ]
*SN Siren FJ
tEM Electromagnetic with moving coil
(moving-coil leads should be
10.3.4 4-conductor handset
identified)
}EMN Electromagnetic with moving coil
and neutralizing winding (mov
ing-coil leads should be iden
tified)

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line ^ne-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

51
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 11 SECTION 11
11.1 to
Graphic Symbols for 11.1 to
11.2.8 Lamps and Visual-Signaling Devices 11.2.8

11.1 Lamp 11.1.5 Ballast lamp; ballast tube If confusion with other circular symbols
The primary characteristic of the element may occur, the D-shaped symbol should
11.1.1 Lamp, general; light source, within the circle is designed to vary non- be used.
general linearly with the temperature of the ele
ment.
See also item 11.2.7
D
O O
See paragraph A4.11 of the Introduction
OR

Z D ) See Note 11.LIB


NOTE 11.1.1 A: This symbol may be used to
represent one or more lamps with or without OR


operating auxiliaries.
11.2 Visual Signaling Device
NOTE 11.1.IB: If it is essential to indicate w
See Note 11.2.7A
the following characteristics, the specified letter 11.2.1 Annunciator (general)
or letters may be inserted within or placed adja Avoid conflict with symbols 4.5, 12.1.1,
cent to the symbol.

-o
and 13.1.2 if used on the same diagram.
A Amber
11.2.7.1 Application: green signal light
Blue
C Clear
G
O
OP
Green
Orange
Opalescent
-0- CD
Purple 11.2.2 Annunciator drop or signal,
R Red shutter or grid type OR
W White
Y

ARC
Yellow

Arc

EL Electroluminescent
FL Fluorescent 11.2.8 Jeweled signal light
HG Mercury vapor
IN Incandescent
IR
NA
NE
Infrared
Sodium vapor
Neon
11.2.3 Annunciator drop or signal, ball
type
UV Ultraviolet See Note 11.LIB
XE Xenon

11.1.2 Fluorescent lamp Cross References


11.1.2.1 2-terminal
11.2.4 Manually restored drop

11.1.2.2 4-terminal

11.2.5 Electrically restored drop


11.1.3 Glow lamp cold-cathode
lamp; neon lamp

11.1.3.1 Alternating-current type

TEC ^
(3^ 11.2.6 Communication switchboard-
type lamp; indicating lamp

11.1.3.2 Direct-current type

See also ELECTRON


7.3.4.1)
TUBE (symbol -L2)
11.2.7 Indicating, pilot, signaling, or
IEC ( ^ ^ switchboard light; indicator light F];
signal light

11.1.4 Incandescent lamp (incan NOTE 11.2.7A:The asterisk is not part of the
descent-filament illuminating lamp) circular symbol. Always add the letter or letters
for colors specified in Note 11.LIB within or
adjacent to the circle. To avoid confusion with
meter or basic relay symbols, add suffix L or IL
to the letter or letters, for example, RL or RIL
placed within or adjacent to the circle.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

52
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 12 SECTION 12
12.1 to
Graphic Symbols for 12.1 to
Readout Devices 12.2.2

12.1 Meter 12.1.1 Galvanometer FJ


Instrument
Avoid conflict with symbols 4.5 and
NOTE 12.1A: The asterisk is not part of the 13.1.2 if used on the same diagram.
lymbol. Always replace the asterisk by one of the
following letter combinations, depending on the
function of the meter or instrument, unless some He
other identification is provided in the circle and
explained on the diagram. OR


'See Note 12.1A 12.2 Electromagnetically Operated
Counter
Message Register
A Ammeter F] HT
AH Ampere-hour meter
12.2.1 General
C Coulombmeter
Contact-making (or breaking)
CMA ammeter
Contact-making (or breaking)
CMC clock
Contact-making (or breaking)
CMV voltmeter 12.2.2 With make contact

4^
Oscilloscope FJ
CRO Cathode-ray oscillograph
DB (decibel) meter
DB Audio level/meter FJ
DBM (decibels referred to
DBM 1 milliwatt) meter
DM Demand meter Cross References
DTR Demand-totalizing relay
F Frequency meter F ]
GD Ground detector
I Indicating meter
INT Integrating meter
or
UA Microammeter
MA Milliammeter
NM Noise meter
OHM Ohmmeter F j
OP Oil pressure meter
OSCG Oscillograph, string
PF Power factor meter
PH Phasemeter FJ
PI Position indicator
RD Recording demand meter
REC Recording meter
RF Reactive factor meter
SY Synchroscope
t Temperature meter
THC Thermal converter
TLM Telemeter
TT Total time meter
Elapsed time meter
V Voltmeter FJ Tice
VA Volt-ammeter
VAR Varmeter FJ
VARH Varhour meter
VI Volume indicator
Audio-level meter El
VU Standard volume indicator
Audio-level meter FJ
W Wattmeter W
WH Watthour meter

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

53
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 13 Graphic Symbols for SECTION 13
13.1 to 13.1 to
13.4.8 Rotating Machinery 13.4.8

13.1 Rotating Machine 13.2 Field, Generator or Motor 13.4.2 t Separately excited direct-cur
rent generator or motor; with commutat
13.1.1 Basic Either symbol of item 6.2.1 may be used ing or compensating field winding, or
in the following items. both

13.2.1 Compensating or commutating


13.1.2 Generator 1 (general)
TEC

He ( G )
13.2.2 Series

Avoid conflict with symbols 12.1.1 and TEC 13.4.3 JCompositely excited direct-
21.5.1 if used on the same diagram. current generator or motor; with com
13.2.3 Shunt, or separately excited mutating or compensating field winding,
OR or both

13.2.4 Permanent magnet


13.1.2.1 Generator, direct-current
USE SYMBOL 2.8
Us
13.3 Winding Connection Symbols
13.1.2.2 Generator, alternating-current
Motor and generator winding connection
symbols may be shown in the basic circle
IEC ^g) 13.4.4 Direct-current series motor or
using the following representations.
2-wire generator
13.1.2.3 Generator, synchronous 13.3.1 1-phase

TEC ( G S )

13.1.3 Motor (general) 13.3.2 2-phase 13.4.5 t Direct-current series motor or

TEC (m) 2-wire generator; with commutating or


compensating field winding, or both

OR
13.3.3 3-phase wye (ungrounded)
(MO
13.1.3.1 Motor, direct-current

TEC (m) 13.3.4 3-phase wye (grounded)

13.1.3.2 Motor, alternating-current 13.4.6 Direct-current shunt motor or


2-wire generator
TEC 13.3.5 3-phase delta

KM
13.1.3.3 Motor, synchronous

TEC ( M S )
13.3.6 6-phase diametrical

13.1.4 Motor, multispeed


13.4.7 Direct-current shunt motor or
2-wire generator; with commutating or
USE SYMBOLS 13.1.3 A N D
13.3.7 6-phase double-delta compensating field winding, or both
NOTE SPEEDS

13.1.5 t Rotating armature with com I


mutator and brushes
I
13.4 Applications: Direct-Current Ma
I chines

13.4.1 Separately excited direct-cur


rent generator or motor
13.4.8 t Direct-current permanent-mag
net-field generator or motor
13.1.6 Hand generator

TEC ( G ) = L

X The broken line indicates where line


connection to a symbol is made and is not part
of the symbol.
-0 01 ]
NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

54
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 13 SECTION 13
13.4.9 to Graphic Symbols for 13.4.9 to
13.5.4 Rotating Machinery 13.5.4

13.4.91 Direct-current compound motor 13.4.15 Direct-current balancer, shunt 13.4.22 Regulating generator (rotary
or 2-wire generator or stabilized shunt wound amplifier), shunt wound with compensat
motor ing field winding and short-circuited
brushes

-/-

13.4.10 Direct-current compound mo


tor or 2-wire generator or stabilized shunt
motor; with commutating or compensat
ing field winding, or both 13.4.23 Regulating generator (rotary
amplifier), shunt woud with compensat
13.4.16 Direct-current balancer, com ing field winding, without short-circuited
pound wound
brushes

P ^
ft
13.4.11 Direct-current 3-wire shunt
generator
13.5 Applications: Alternating-Current
Machines

13.4.17 Dynamotor 13.5.1 t Squirrel-cage induction motor

^u?
or generator, split-phase induction motor

9J?
or generator, rotary phase converter, or
repulsion motor
13.4.12 t Direct-current 3-wire shunt
generator; with commutating or compen
I
sating field winding, or both
13.4.18 Double-current generator

13.5.2 Wound-rotor induction motor,


synchronous induction motor, induction
generator, or induction frequency con
verter
13.4.13 t Direct-current 3-wire com
pound generator 13.4.19 Acyclic generator, separately
excited I

f<JH -
13.5.3 Alternating-current series motor

13.4.14 Direct-current 3-wire com 13.4.20 Regulating generator (rotary


pound generator; with commutating or amplifier), shunt wound with short-cir
compensating field winding, or both cuited brushes

13.5.4 Alternating-current series mo


tor, with commutating or compensating
field winding, or both
13.4.21 Regulating generator (rotary
amplifier), shunt wound without short-
circuited brushes

t The broken line indicates where line


connection to a symbol is made and is not part
of the symbol.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

55
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 13 Graphic Symbols for SECTION 13
13.5.5 to 13.5.5 to
13.7.3 Rotating Machinery 13.7.3

13.5.5 l-phase shaded-pole motor 13.5.16 3-phase regulating machine 13.6.5 Synchronous-synchronous fre
quency changer

O O
=9
13.5.6 l-phase repulsion-start induc
tion motor
I I
IB

13.5.7 l-phase hysteresis motor
-
-e =e 13.5.17 Phase shifter with 1-phase out
put
13.6.6 t Synchronous-induction
quency changer
fre
13.5.8 Reluctance motor See PHASE SHIFTER (item 16.6) and
TRANSFORMER (item 6.4)

3 3
r 9 - 4
13.5.9 l-phase subsynchronous reluct
ance motor

G
13.5.18 Phase shifter with 3-phase out
put

13.5.10 t Magnetoelectric generator, 1- See PHASE SHIFTER (item 16.6) and
phase; telephone magneto TRANSFORMER (item 6.4)
13.7 Applications: Alternating- and Di
rect-Current Composite
-O] 13.7.1 Synchronous or regulating-pole
13.5.11 t Shunt-characteristic brush- converter
shifting motor 13.6 Applications: Alternating-Current
Machines with Direct-Current Field Ex
citation

13.6.1 Synchronous motor, generator,


or condenser
13.5.12 Series-characteristic brush-
shifting motor with 3-phase rotor
13.7.2 Synchronous booster or regu
lating-pole converter; with commutatng
or compensating field windings, or both

13.6.2 Synchronous motor, generator,


13.5.13 Series-characteristic brush- or condenser with neutral brought out
shifting motor with 6- or 8-phase rotor

9
13.6.3 Synchronous motor, generator,
13.5.14 Ohmic-drop exciter with 3- or
6-phase input or condenser with both ends of each
phase brought out
13.7.3 Synchronous converter, shunt-
wound with commutating or compen
- - sating field windings, or both

13.5.15 Ohmic-drop exciter with 3- or


6-phase input, with output leads
9
13.6.4 Double-winding synchronous
generator, motor, or condenser

I I
- 6 -

t The broken line indicates where line


connection to a symbol is made and is not part
of the symbol.
O
NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

56
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 13 SECTION 13
13.7.4 to
Graphic Symbols for
13.7.4 to
13.8.4 Rotating Machinery 13.8.4

13.7.4 Synchronous converter, com 13.8.4 Synchro, resolver FJ


pound-wound with commutating or com
pensating field windings, or both Type shown: 2-phase rotor and 2-phase
stator

13.7.5 Motor converter


Cross References

13.8 Synchro FJ

If identification is required, a letter com


bination from the following list shall be
placed adjacent to the symbol to indicate
the type of synchro.

CDX Control-differential transmitter


CT Control transformer
CX Control transmitter
TDR Torque-differential receiver
TDX Torque-differential transmitter
TR Torque receiver
TX Torque transmitter
RS Resolver

If the outer winding is rotatable in bear


ings, the suffix shall be added to the
above letter combinations.

13.8.1 General

Complete symbols may also be formed by-


using the winding symbol 6.2.1.

13.8.2 Synchro, control transformer;


synchro, receiver FJ ; synchro, transmitter
El

13.8.3 Synchro, differential receiver;


synchro, differential transmitter F|

t The broken line indicates where line


connection to a symbol is made and is not part
of the symbol.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

57
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 14 SECTION 14
14.1 to
Graphic Symbols for 14.1 to
14.3.4 Mechanical Functions 14.3.4

14.1 Mechanical Connection 14.2.5 Rotation designation (applied to


Mechanical Interlock a resistor) Cross References
The preferred location of the mechanical C W indicates position of adjustable con
connection is as shown in the various ap tact at the limit of clockwise travel
plications, but other locations may be viewed from knob or actuator end unless
equally acceptable. otherwise indicated.

14.1.1 Mechanical connection NOTE 14.2.5A: The asterisk is not part of


the symbol. Always add identification within or
The top symbol consists of short dashes. adjacent to the rectangle.

NOTE: 14.1.1A: The short parallel lines


should be used only where there is insufficient
space for the short dashes in series. See symbol
4.9.3 for application.

IEC

OR

See Note 14.1.1A


* See Note 14.2.5A
14.1.2 Mechanical connection or inter
14.2.6 Rotational speed or angular ve
lock with fulcrum
locity dependence
These are short dashes.

See symbol 4.24.4 for application

14.1.3 Mechanical interlock, other He {J


INDICATE BY A NOTE
14.3 Clutch
Brake
14.2 Mechanical Motion
14.3.1 Clutch disengaged when operat
14.2.1 Translation, one direction
ing means (not shown) is deenergized
or nonoperated
14.2.2 Translation, both directions
IEC |___

OR

14.2.3 Rotation, one direction --)}-


14.3.2 Clutch engaged when operating
m (j means (not shown) is deenergized or
nonoperated

14.2.3.1 Angular motion, applied to 1


J
open contact (make), symbol 4.3.2
OR

NOTE: 14.2.3.1A: The asterisk is not part of


the symbol. Explanatory information (similar to
type shown) may be added if necessary to ex ~ T * ~
plain circuit operation. 14.3.3 Brake applied when operating
means (not shown) is energized
1 6 X L / R E V *

OR
OR

- - ^ ) 6 _ T L / R E V *
14.3.4 Brake released when operating
means (not shown) is energized
* See Note 14.2.3.1 A

14.2.4 Rotation, both directions


OR

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

58
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 15 SECTION 15
15.1 to
Graphic Symbols 15.1 to
15.2.4 Commonly Used in Connection with VHF, UHF, SHF Circuits 15.2.4

15.1 Discontinuity (Introducing inten 15.1.2.5 Inductance-capacitance circuit 15.1.6 Multistub tuner with 3 stubs
tional wave reflection) with infinite reactance at resonance

A component that exhibits throughout


the frequency range of interest the prop
IEC
erties of the type of circuit element indi
cated by the symbol within the triangle.

Commonly used for coaxial and wave 15.1.3 Equivalent shunt element, gen 15.2 Coupling
guide transmission. eral, in parallel with guided transmission
path Commonly used in coaxial and wave
15.1.1 General guide diagrams.

15.2.1 Coupling by aperture with an


Y opening of less than full waveguide size

Transmission loss may be indicated.


15.1.1.1 Terminal discontinuity (one- 15.1.3.1 Capacitive reactance
port) NOTE 15.2.1A: The asterisk is not part of
the symbol. Always replace the asterisk by E,
H, or HE, depending on the type of coupling.
indicates that the physical plane of the
aperture is perpendicular to the transverse com
ponent of the major lines.
indicates that the physical plane of the
15.1.1.2 Discontinuity (two-port) 15.1.3.2 Inductive reactance aperture is parallel to the transverse component
of the major lines.
HE indicates coupling by all other kinds of
apertures.
IEC

IEC

See Note 15.2.1 A


15.1.2 Equivalent series element, gen
eral, in series with guided transmission 15.1.3.3 Resistance
15.2.1.1 Application: -plane coupling
path by aperture to space

-
15.2.1.2 Application: -plane coupling
15.1.2.1 Capacitive reactance by aperture; 2 ends of transmission path
15.1.3.4 Inductance-capacitance circuit
having zero reactance at resonance available

--
15.2.1.3 Application: -plane coupling
by aperture; 3 ends of transmission path
available
15.1.2.2 Inductive reactance
15.1.3.5 Inductance-capacitance circuit
having infinite reactance at resonance
I
15.2.1.4 Application: -plane coupling
by aperture; 4 ends of transmission path
available
TEC ( E )
15.1.2.3 Resistance
15.2.2 Coupling by loop to space
15.1.4 Slide-screw tuner

15.2.3 Coupling by loop to guided


transmission path
15.1.2.4 Inductance-capacitance circuit
with zero reactance at resonance

15.1.5 E- tuner 15.2.4 Coupling by loop from coaxial


to circular waveguide with direct-current
grounds connected

t The broken line indicates where line


connection to a symbol is made and is not part
of the symbol.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

59
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 15 SECTION 15
Graphic Symbols
15.2.5 to 15.2.5 to
15.8.1 Commonly Used in Connection with VHF, UHF, SHF Circuits 15.8.1

15.2.5 Coupling by probe to space 15.4 Hybrid 15.5 Mode Transducer


Directionally Selective
See OPEN CIRCUIT (item 3.8.1) Transmission Devices Commonly used in coaxial and wave
guide diagrams.
TEC 15.4.1 Hybrid (general)
If it is desired to specify the type of
15.2.6 Coupling by probe to guided transmission, appropriate indications may
transmission path be added.

15.5.1 General
IEC

15.4.2 Hybrid, junction (magic T) IEC


15.2.7 Coupling by probe from coaxial
Commonly used in coaxial and wave
to rectangular waveguide with direct-
guide transmission 15.5.2 Application: transition from
current grounds connected
rectangular to circular waveguide

1-8 -
15.5.3 Application: transition from rec
15.3 Directional Coupler FJ 15.4.3 Application: rectangular wave
tangular waveguide to coaxial cable with
guide and coaxial coupling
Commonly used in coaxial and wave mode suppression and direct-current
grounds connected
guide diagrams.

The arrows indicate the directions of


power flow. IEC
TEC ~ ^

Number of coupling paths, type of cou


pling, and transmission loss may be indi
cated. 15.6 Mode Suppressor
15.4.4 Hybrid, circular (basic) Commonly used in coaxial and wave
15.3.1 General

X
guide transmission.
NOTE 15.4.4A: The asterisk is not part of
the symbol. Always replace the asterisk by E, 15.6.1 General
H, or HE. indicates there is a principal
transverse field in the plane of the ring.
indicates that there is a principal transverse TEC / > \
field in the plane of the ring. HE shall be used
for all other cases. 15.7 Rotary Joint (radio-frequency ro
An arm that has coupling of a different type
from that designated above shall be marked
tary coupler FJ )
according to COUPLING (item 15.2.1). 15.7.1 General: with rectangular wave
15.3.2 Application: -plane aperture Critical distances should be labeled in terms of
guide wavelengths. guide system
coupling, 30-decibel transmission loss


NOTE 15.7.1A: The asterisk is not part of
the symbol. If necessary, a transmission path
IEC 30dB recognition symbol may be added. See symbol 3.6.

15.3.3 Application: loop coupling, 30- * See Note 15.4.4A


decibel transmission loss
15.4.4.1 Application: 4-arm circular * See Note 15.7.1 A
IEC hybrid
<\f 30dB 15.7.1.1 Application: coaxial type in
rectangular waveguide system
15.3.4 Application: probe coupling, 30-
decibel transmission loss

IEC 30dB
IEC
-B(g)B-
15.7.1.2 Application: circular wave
guide type in rectangular waveguide sys
15.3.5 Application: resistance coupling,
15.4.4.2 Application: rectangular wave tem
30-decibel transmission loss

X
guide circular hybrid with 3 arms cou

30 dB
pling in the plane and a fourth arm
coupling in the plane -B()B- IEC

15.3.6 Application: directional coupler 15.8 Nonreeiprocal Devices


showing coupling loss and directivity
15.8.1 Isolator
First value is coupling loss; second value See also symbol 8.10
is directivity.
- 2 0 d B

IEC

' \ 4 0 dE

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

60
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 15 SECTION 15
15.8.2 to
Graphic Symbols 15.8.2 to
15.14.1 Commonly Used in Connection with VHF, UHF, SHF Circuits 15.14.1

15.8.2 Nonreciprocal directional phase 15.9.1 General 15.11.2 Transit-time split-plate type
shifter with stabilizing deflecting electrodes and
Commonly used for coaxial and wave
guide transmission. internal circuit

OR
m
G
15.9.2 Application: resonator with
mode suppression coupled by an E-plane
aperture to a guided transmission path 15.11.3 Tunable, aperture coupled

15.8.3 Gyrator and by a loop to a coaxial path

The longer arrow indicates the direction


of propagation in which the required
phase change occurs.

15.12 Velocity-Modulation (velocity-


IEC variation) Tube
15.9.3 Application: tunable resonator
having adjustable Q coupled by a probe
15.12.1 Reflex klystron, integral cavity,
15.8.4 Circulator, fixed direction to a coaxial system
aperture coupled

Arrowhead indicates direction of power


flow from any input to next adjacent arm
but not to any other arm. Circulator may
have three or more ports. 15.9.4 Application: tunable resonator
with direct-current ground connected to
an electron device and adjustably cou
15.12.2 Double-cavity klystron, inte
pled by an -plane aperture to a rectan
gral cavity, permanent externally ganged
gular waveguide
tuning, loop coupled (coupling loop may
be shown inside if desired).

See symbol 15.2.2


15.8.4.1 Reversible direction

Current entering the coil at the end


marked with the dot causes the energy in
the circulator to flow in the direction of
the arrowhead marked with the dot.
15.10 Resonator (cavity-type) Tube

15.10.1 Single-cavity envelope and 15.13 Transmit-Receive ( T R ) Tube


grid-type associated electrodes Gas-filled, tunable integral cavity, aper
ture coupled, with starter.

15.8.5 Field-polarization rotator


15.10.2 Double-cavity envelope and
Arrow indicates direction of rotation of grid-type associated electrodes 15,14 Traveling-Wave-Tube
electric field when viewed in direction of
signal flow. 15.14.1 Forward-wave traveling-wave-
tube amplifier shown with four grids,
45' having slow-wave structure with attenua
tion, magnetic focusing by external per
manent magnet, rf input and rf output
15.8.6 Field-polarization amplitude
15.10.3 Multicavity magnetron anode coupling, each by -plane aperture to ex
modulator
and envelope ternal rectangular waveguide.

15.11 Magnetron

15.11.1 Resonant type with coaxial


15.9 Resonator output
Tuned Cavity fj

Excluding piezoelectric and magneto


striction devices.

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

61

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 15 SECTION 15
Graphic Symbols 15.14.2 to
15.14.2 to
15.19 Commonly Used in Connection with VHF, UHF, SHF Circuits 15.19

15.14.2 Forward-wave traveling-wave- 15.14.6 Backward-wave traveling- 15.16 Filter


tube amplifier shown with four grids, wave-tube amplifier shown with two
having slow-wave structure with attenu grids, having slow-wave structure with 15.16.1 Mode filter
ation, magnetic focusing by external per attenuation, sole (beam-aligning elec
manent magnet, rf input and rf output trode), magnetic focusing by external
coupling, each by inductive coupling permanent magnet, rf input and rf output
coupling, each by -plane aperture to ex
-A
U' ternal rectangular waveguide
15.16.2 Frequency filter (bandpass)

5> 15.17 Phase Shifter (matched)

See also symbol 15.8.2


15.14.3 Forward-wave traveling-wave-
tube amplifier shown with four grids, EC -
having slow-wave structure with attenua
tion, external electromagnetic focusing, rf
input and rf output coupling, even by ex 15.14.7 Backward-wave traveling-
ternal cavity and loop coupling to a co wave-tube oscillator shown with two
axial path grids, having slow-wave structure with
attenuation, sole (beam-aligning elec
trode), magnetic focusing by external
permanent magnet, rf output coupling by 15.18 Ferrite Bead Ring
inductive coupling
See also symbol 6.1.4
1

NOTE 15.18A. If equivalent circuits must be


ehown within the symbol, the size or the aspect
I ratio of the original symbol may be altered pro
III t - L i l L H viding its distinctive shape is retained.

15.18.1 General

15.14.8 Backward-wave traveling-


wave-tube oscillator shown with two
15.14.4 Forward-wave traveling-wave-
grids, having slow-wave structure with 15.18.2 Application: with equivalent
tube amplifier shown with four grids,
attenuation, sole (beam-aligning elec circuit ( L C network) shown
having slow-wave structure with attenua
trode), magnetic focusing by external
tion, magnetic focusing by external per
permanent magnet, rf output coupling by
manent magnet, rf input and rf output
inductive coupling, with slow-wave
coupling, each by direct connection from
structure connected internally to collector
slow-wave structure to a coaxial path
15.19 Line Stretcher (with female con
nectors shown)

15.15 Balun

15.15.1 General Cross References


15.14.5 Forward-wave traveling-wave- Bifilar Slow-Wave Structure (item 2.6.3)
tube amplifier shown with four grids, IEC Capacitive Termination (item 2.2.10)
having bifilar slow-wave structure with Coaxial Cable, Recognition Symbol
attenuation, electrostatic focusing, rf in (item 3.1.9)
15.15.2 Application: balun connected
put and rf output coupling, each by in Inductive Termination (item 6.2.7)
between a balanced dipole and unbal
ductive coupling Intentional Isolation of D C Path in Coaxial
anced coaxial cable
or Waveguide Applications (item 3.5)
Permanent Magnet (item 2.8)
Resistive Termination (item 2.1.11)

<
Shunt Capacitor (item 2.2.9)
Shunt Inductor (item 6.2.6)
Shunt Resistor (item 2.1.10)
Strip-Type Transmission Line (item 3.7)
Termination (item 3.8)
Waveguide (item 3.6)
Waveguide Flanges (item 5.7)

NOTES: I. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

62
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 16 SECTION 16
16.1 to
Graphic Symbols for
16.1 to
16.3.4 Composite Assemblies 16.3.4

16.1 Circuit Assembly NOTE 16.2.1A: If identification, electrical 16.2.7 Application: amplifier with asso
Circuit Subassembly values, location data, and similar information
must be noted within a symbol, the size or ciated power supply
Circuit Element aspect ratio of the original symbol may be al
tered providing its distinctive shape is retained.
NOTE 16.1A: The asterisk is not part of the
symbol. Always indicate the type of apparatus
by appropriate words or letters in the rectangle. Amplifier use may be indicated in the tri
angle by words, standard abbreviations,
NOTE 16.1B: If identification, electrical val or a letter combination from the follow
ues, location data, and similar information must ing list: See Note 16.2.1 A
be noted within a symbol, the size or the aspect
ratio of the original symbol may be altered
providing its distinctive shape is retained. BDG Bridging 16.2.8 Application: amplifier with ex
BST Booster ternal feedback path
NOTE 16.1C: The use of a general circuit- CMP Compression
element symbol is restricted to the following: DC Direct-current
a. Diagrams drawn in block form. EXP Expansion
h. A substitute for complex circuit elements LIM Limiting
when the internal operation of the circuit
element is not important to the purpose MON Monitoring
of the diagram. PGM Program
c. Applications where a specific graphic sym See Note 16.2.1A
PRE Preliminary
bol, or the parts to devise a suitable build PWR
up, do not appear elsewhere in this stan Power
TRQ Torque 16.3 Rectifier
dard.
See ELECTRON TUBE (item 7.1),
16.1.1 General SEMICONDUCTOR DIODE (symbol
IEC IEC
8.5.1), and SEMICONDUCTOR DE
VICE (item 8.1)

See Note 16.2.1A 16.3.1 General


See Note 16.1 A

16.1.1.1 Accepted abbreviations from 16.2.2 Magnetic amplifier


NOTE 16.3.1A: Triangle points in direction
ANSI Z32.13-1950 may be used in the of forward (easy) current as indicated by a
rectangle. direct-current ammeter, unless otherwise noted
adjacent to the symbol. Electron flow is in the
opposite direction.
16.1.1.2 The following letter combina
tions may be used in the rectangle: NOTE 16.3.IB: This symbol represents any
16.2.3 Application: amplifier with two method of rectification (electron tube, solid-
state device, electrochemical device, etc).
CLK Clock inputs
EQ
FAX
FL
Equalizer
Facsimile set
Filter IEC IEC
4>h
See Notes 16.3.1 A and
FL-BE Filter, band-elimination
FL-BP Filter, bandpass F J
16.3.2 Controlled
FL-HP Filter, high-pass FJ See Note 16.2.1A
FL-LP Filter, low-pass
IND Indicator 16.2.4 Application: amplifier with two
PS Power supply FJ outputs
RG Recording unit See Notes 16.3.1 A and
RU Reproducing unit
ST-INV Static inverter
- f > = 16.3.3 Bridge-type rectifier
DIAL Telephone dial ^> IE JEC >

TEL Telephone station See item 8.5.1


TPR Teleprinter fJ See Note 16.2.1A
TTY Teletypewriter FJ
16.2.5 Application: amplifier with ad
16.2 Amplifier justable gain

See also DIRECT-CURRENT MA


CHINES (symbols 13.4.20 to 13.4.23) IEC IEC
16.3.4 On connection or wiring dia
grams, rectifier may be shown with ter
16.2.1 General minals and polarity marking. Heavy line
See Note 16.2.1A may be used to indicate nameplate or
The triangle is pointed in the direction of positive-polarity end.
transmission. 16.2.6 Application: amplifier with asso

The symbol represents any method of


ciated attenuator [OOOO
amplification (electron tube, solid-state For connection or wiring diagram
device, magnetic device, etc).

See Note 16.2.1A

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-b'ne) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

63

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 16 SECTION 16
Graphic Symbols for 16.4 to
16.4 to
16.8 Composite Assemblies 16.8

16.4 Repeater (includes Telephone Re 16.6.4 Differential phase shifter


peater F ] )
Phase shift in direction of arrowhead;
16.4.1 1-way repeater magnitudes shall be indicated.

Triangle points in the direction of trans


mission.

16.6.5 Application: adjustable


16.4.2 2-wire, 2-way repeater

HLXI
16.4.3 2-wire, 2-way repeater with low-
frequency bypass 16.7 Chopper El

NOTE 16.7A: The explanatory words are not


part of the symbol.
NOTE 16.7B:" When diagram is other than
single line, show connections as required for a
specific device.
16.4.4 4-wire, 2-way repeater

SIGNAL CHOPPED
INPUT OUTPUT

CHOPPER
DRIVE
16.5 Network
Artificial Line (other than
16.8 Diode-Type Ring Demodulator
delay line)
Diode-Type Ring Modulator
16.5.1 General

16.5.2 Network, low-voltage power

Cross References
16.6 Phase Shifter Oscillator (item 2.9)
Phase-Changing Network

For power circuits see ALTERNATING-


CURRENT MACHINES (symbols
13.5.17 and 13.5.18)

16.6.1 General

16.6.2 3-wire or 3-phase

16.6.3 Application: adjustable

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

64
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 17 SECTION 17
Graphic Symbols for
AND AND
SECTION 18 Analog and Digital Logic Functions SECTION 18

17.1 Operational Amplifier 17.6 Electronic Function Generator 18.1 Digital Logic Functions

(See cross references)

17.2 Summing Amplifier


17.7 Generalized Integrator Cross References
The following standards do not constitute
(4 inputs and 1 output shown)
1 a part of this standard; they are listed for

I>- reference purposes only:

American National Standard Graphic


17.8 Positional Servomechanism Symbols for Logic Diagrams Y32.14-
1962
Avoid conflict with item 2.6 if used on
the same diagram. MIL-STD-806B-Craphic Symbols for
Logic Diagrams
NOTE 17.8A: Dashed line indicates positioned
17.3 Integrator (Amplifier) in accordance with an input signal.
MIL-STD-00806C (NAVY) -Graphic
Symbols for Logic Diagrams
(4 inputs and 1 output shown)
NEMA StandardIndustrial Control
NOTE 17.3A: The asterisk is not part of the
symbol. Always add identification within or ad ICS-1970
See Note 17.8A
jacent to the circle.
NOTE 17.3B: The letters IC mean Initial 17.9 Function Potentiometer
Conditions.

OR

Cross References

1 I c
* See Note 17.3A

17.4 Electronic Multiplier

17.4.1 Two dependent multipliers

17.5 Electronic Divider

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

65

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 19 Graphic Symbols for SECTION 19
19.0 to 19.0 to
19.2.8 Special-Purpose 19.2.8
Maintenance Diagrams
19.0 Introduction 19.1.2.3 Reference signal voltage; ref- 19.2.2 Signal generator; signal pro-
erence frequency cessor
The graphic symbols shown in this sec-
tion were developed primarily for use on NOTE 19.2.2A: This symbol represents an
special-purpose maintenance diagrams, active circuit (of one or more stages) which
generates a signal or processes an incoming
such as symbolic integrated maintenance- 19.1.2.4 Signal to energize relay signal in a manner other than to change the
type diagrams, to provide detailed main- signal voltage or power level, e.g., oscillator,
tenance and operating information. See multivibrator, mixer, etc. Such circuits contain
one or more active elements, such as an elec-
also item 23.1(3) for reference docu- tron tube, transistor, or diode.
ment. Use on other types of diagrams,
however, is recommended if necessary to 19.1.2.5 Transmitter pulse; pulse-form-
emphasize particular functions as defined ing network, discharge path, or subse-

-D-.s~
in this section. t t quent high-level modulation pulse
NOTE 19.1.2.5A: This symbol shall be used
See paragraph A4.5 of the Introduction only on a major (most significant) functional Not. IS.2.lB
flow path.
19.1 Data-Flow Code Signals
19.2.3 Linear element; linear network
NOTE 19.1A: Use only if essential to pro-
vide detailed maintenance and operation infor- NOTE 19.2.3A: This symbol represents a
resistor, a capacitor, or a network consisting of
mation (such as symbolic integrated maintenance 19.1.2.6 Gating; synchronizing signal; any combination of these linear elements, such
manual diagrams). low-level modulating signal as a filter network, voltage divider, pulse-form-
ing network, etc.
19.1.1 Functional How path NOTE 19.1.2.6A: This symbol shall be used
only on a minor (least significant) functional
NOTE 19.1.1A: Emphasis is required when flow path.


it is necessary to differentiate between two rela-
tively significant functional flow paths.
"See Note 19.2.1B

-
19.1.1.1 Major (most significant)
19.1.2.7 Test signal; signal used to
light a lamp or provide a meter reading OR

19.1.1.2 Minor (least significant)

19.1.2.8 Feedback
19.2.4 Relay contacts
NOTE 19.1.2.8A: The arrowheads shall be
19.1.2 Signal code placed close together.

NOTE 19.1.2A: All signal-code symbols shall


be drawn on the functional flow path lines, e.g., See Note 19.2.1B
19.1.3 Fault-signal code
19.2.5 Relay coil or operating coil
NOTE 19.1.3A: All fault signals shall use
19.1.2.1 Normal the signal-code symbols shown in items 19.1.2
through 19.1.2.6, except that they are not to be
NOTE 19.1.2.1A: The asterisk is not part of filled in.
the symbol. Add an identification code letter
when necessary for clarity. 19.1.3.1 Application: fault-isolation
Signal to relay See Note 19.2.1B
19.2.6 Switch
See Note 19.1.2.1A
19.2 Functional Circuits
19.1.2.1.1 Application: emergency
mode See Note 19.1A
19.2.1 Amplifier circuit (such as volt- See Note 19.2.1B
age amplifier, power amplifier etc.)
19.1.2.1.2 Application: automatic mode 19.2.7 Digital logic elements
NOTE 19.2.1A: This symbol represents an
active circuit (of one or more stages) which
changes the voltage or power level of the in- See Section 18
coming signal, and contains one or more non ..
linear active elements, such as an electron tube, 19.2.8 Composite circuit (other than
19.1.2.2 Secondary How; power distri- transistor, or diode. those covered by symbols 19.2.1 through
bution NOTE 19.2.1B: The asterisk is not part of
19.2.6)
the symbol. A circuit identifier code should be

-1'-.-r-
added for proper identification of the basic
symbol.

--G>-
*
See Note 19.2.1B
U The symbols shown in this section have
comparable meanings or applications when used
for drawings in mechanical, medical, or other
disciplines or fields. See Note 19.2.1B Cross References

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

66
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 20 . u SECTION 20
Ctommunicatons _ ^rapniC aymDOlS Communications
Equipment Commonly Used on System Diagrams, Equipment
2 20.1
0 1 1 to
5, Maps, and Charts 20.4.5.3
0

20.1 Radio Station 20.1.7 Passive relay 20.3.2 Automatic switching

Other antenna symbols may be used to


indicate specific types.
NOTE 20.1A: The asterisk is not part of the
symbol; identification of the type of station may 20.3.3 Manual switchboard
be added within or adjacent to the symbol.

20.1.1 General 20.2 Space Station

20.2.1 General
20.4 Telegraph Repeater

IEC
IEC

20.2.2 Active space station


The letter "T" may be omitted if no con
fusion will result.

20.4.1 One-way simplex operation


* See Note 20.1 A

20.1.2 Portable
V IEC


m 20.4.2 Two-way simplex operation

IEC
20.2.3 Passive space station

20.4.3 Duplex operation



20.1.3 Mobile

20.4.4 Qualifying symbols


20.2.4 Earth station used for tracking a The following symbols are restricted to
space station (shown with a paraboloidal use with the symbols in item 20.4 of
antenna) this standard.

20.4.4.1 Polar direct-current (double


current)
20.1.4 Direction-finding
t JEc
20.4.4.2 Neutral direct-current (single
current)
IEC +
OR
0
OR
- 0
OR IEC
O + 0 -

20.2.5 Application: earth station of a 20.4.4.3 Alternating-current


communication service via space station o


f JEC
20.1.5 Radio beacon 20.4.5 Applications:
20.4.5.1 Polar direct-current for duplex
operation

XX

20.3 Exchange Equipment


20.4.5.2 Polar direct-current/neutral
direct-current for one-way simplex opera
20.1.6 Controlling 20.3.1 General
tion j

NOTE 20.3.1A: The asterisk is not part of


the symbol. Replace the asterisk with informa
tion to specify a particular application.

20.4.5.3 Polar direct-current/altemat-


ing-current for one-way simplex operation

* See Note 20.3.1A

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A 3 . 1 ) . 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

fV7
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 20 SECTION 20
Communications Graphic Symbols Communications
Equipment Commonly Used on System Diagrams, Equipment
20.4.5.4 to 20.4.5.4 to
20.6.12
Maps, and Charts 20.6.12

20.4.5.4 Regenerative type for one-way 20.5.7 Applications: 20.6.3 Common-battery


simplex operation
20.5.7.1 Tape-printing receiver
IEC

J7 IEC

20.6.4 Dial-type

20.5 Telegraph Equipment 20.5.7.2 Tape-printing receiver with NOTE 20.6.4A: The dots may be omitted if
keyboard transmitter no confusion would result.
20.5.1 General
NOTE 20.5.1A: The letter "T" may be re
placed by a suitable qualifying symbol from IEC
item 20.5.6.

20.5.7.3 Printing reperforator 20.6.5 Pushbutton dialing


TEC

IEC
20.5.2 Transmitter

20.5.7.4 Page-printing receiver 20.6.6 With two or more extension


lines
IEC

IEC
20.5.3 Receiver
20.5.7.5 Page-printing receiver with
keyboard transmitter 20.6.7 With coin box
TEC*

~czr IEC

20.5.4 Two-way simplex

20.5.7.6 Facsimile receiver 20.6.8 With ringing generator

20.5.5 Duplex
20.5.7.7 Keyboard perforator
20.6.9 Loudspeaker-type

IEC
IEC
^ iE
20.5.6 Qualifying symbols 20.5.7.8 Automatic transmitter using
perforated tape 20.6.10 Amplifier-type
The following symbols are restricted to
use with the symbols in Section 20.5 of
this standard. IEC
IEC
20.5.6.1 Tape printing
IEC
20.5.7.9 Separate reperforator and au
20.5.6.2 Tape perforating; perforated 20.6.11 Sound-powered
tomatic transmitter with continuous tape
tape
feed
TEC

20.5.6.3 Simultaneous printing on and IEC


IEC
perforating of one tape

TEC 20.6.12 Key or pushbutton type with


20.6 Telephone Set
special facilities (other than dialing or
20.5.6.4 Page printing multiline operation)
20.6.1 General
I I TEC

20.5.6.5 Keyboard

JEc
20.6.2 Local-battery
20.5.6.6 Facsimile
Cross References
IEC

NOTES: 1. See Introduction for general information (note especially A3.1). 2. Symbols for single-line (one-line) diagrams appear
at the left, symbols for complete diagrams at the right, and symbols suitable for both purposes are centered in each column.

68
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 21 SECTION 21
Generating Stations Graphic Symbols Generating Stations
and Substations Commonly Used on System Diagrams, and Substations
21.1 to 21.1 to
21.5.2 Maps, and Charts 21.5.2

21.1 Generating Station 21.3.4 Nuclear energy fueled

NOTE 21.1A: Symbols for "planned" appli

O
cations appear at the left; symbols for "in ser
vice" applications appear at the right.

NOTE 21.IB: The preferred symbol is the


square, but if necessary, a rectangle may be
used. 21.3.5 Geothermic

NOTE 21.1C: Relative sizes of symbols are


shown. Symbol size may be reduced for small- IEC
size diagrams. See also paragraph A4.5 of the
Introduction.

21.1.1 General 21.4 Prime Mover (qualifying symbols)


See Note 21.1A
Use if essential to show the type of prime
mover in a generating station.

See Note 21.1A

21.2 Hydroelectric Generating Station 21.4.1 Gas turbine

See Note 21.1 A TEC


21.4.1.1 Application: shown for oil- or
21.2.1 General
gas-fueled generating station

21.2.2 Run of river


PI
D
21.4.2 Reciprocating engine
m
IEC

21.4.2.1 Application: shown for oil- or


gas-fueled generating station

w
21.2.3 With storage
IEC /

0 21.5 Substation

See Note 21.1A


21.2.4 With pumped storage

21.5.1 General

Avoid conflict with symbol 13.1.1 if used


on the same diagram.
21.3 Thermoelectric Generating Station

See Note 21.1A

21.3.1 General
O 21.5.2 Rectifier substation

IEC Use if essential to show type of equip


ment.

21.3.2 Coal or lignite fueled


21.3.3 Oil or gas fueled
Cross References


n
A
PLANNED IN SERVICE PLANNED IN SERVICE

69
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION22 Class Designation Letters* S E C T I O N 22
2 2 1 t o
for use in assignment o f reference designations for electrical a n d electronics 22.1 to
22.4 A to D S p a r t sequipments as described in A N S I Y32.16-1968 and Y32.16A
a n d
22.4 A to DS

22.1 Class Letter 22.2.4 Specific versus general AR ...amplifier (other than rotating)?]
The letters identifying the class of an amplifier, magnetic (other than
The letters "A" and " U " (for assembly)
item shall be selected in accordance with rotating)
shall not be used if more specific class
the list in paragraph 22.4. amplifier, operational
letters are assigned for a particular item.
amplifier, summing
For reference purposes, see also individ repeater
22.2.5 Nonrepairable subassemblies
ual listing of the items in the index. repeater, telephone
Potted, embedded, or hermetically sealed
Graphic symbols do not appear in this subassemblies, modular assemblies, AT . . . attenuator, fixed FJ
standard for H , HP, MP, N, and W T printed circuit boards, and integrated cir attenuator, variable FJ
(listed in paragraph 22.4) because they cuit packages which are ordinarily re bolometer
apply to items beyond the scope of this placed as a single item of supply shall be capacitive termination
standard. treated as parts. inductive termination
isolator (nonreciprocal device)
Certain item names and designating let 22.3 Item Names pad
ters may apply to either a part or an as resistive termination
In the alphabetically arranged class letter
sembly.
list of paragraph 22.4, item names ap . . . . blower
proved in the Federal Item Identification fan
22.2 Special Considerations for Class Guide, Cataloging Handbook H6-1, as of fan, centrifugal FJ
Letter Assignment the date of this edition (though addi motor FJ
tional modifiers may be necessary), are synchro FJ
22.2.1 Actual versus intended function indicated by the symbol FJ . For defini synchro, resolver
tions which are not contained in Hand
If a part serves a purpose other than its book H6-1, see American National Stand BT . . . barrier photocell
generally intended one, the function ac ard C42 (series). battery Fj
tually performed shall be represented by
blocking layer cell
the graphic symbol used in the schematic
22.4 Class Designation Letters: Alpha cell, battery
diagram; the class letter shall be chosen
betical List cell, solar
from the list in paragraph 22.4 and shall
be indicative of its physical characteris Parts not specifically included in this list transducer, photovoltaic
tics. For example, a lamp used as a non shall be assigned a letter or letters al
C . . . . capacitor FJ
linear resistor would be represented by ready assigned to the part or class most
capacitor bushing
the graphic symbol for a nonlinear resis similar in function.
tor (actual function), but the class letter Designations for general classes of parts CB . . . circuit breaker 0
would be "DS" (class of part). If a part are marked with an asterisk ( * ) to facili
has a dual function the class letter for the tate designation of parts not specifically CP . . . adapter, connector
type of part shall apply. included in this list. coupling (aperture, loop, or
A* . . 1
. accelerometerFJ probe)
(see assembly, separable or repairable 2
junction (coaxial or waveguide)
22.2.2 Assembly versus subassembly
also circuit element, general
U computer fJ CR . . . absorber, overvoltage
The term subassembly as used herein current regulator (semiconductor
shall apply equally to an assembly. and divider, electronic
22.2.4 facsimile setFJ device)
generator, electronic demodulator, diode-type ring
22.2.3 Subassembly versus individual function (other than rotating) detector, crystal
part integrator diode, capacitive
integrator, general diode, semiconductor
diode, storage
A group of parts shall not be treated as a modulator
diode, tunnel
subassembly unless it is one or more of modulator, field-polarization am
the following: plitude modulator, diode-type ring
multiplier, electronic photodiode
( a ) A plug-in item.
recorder, sound FJ rectifier, metallic
( b ) A significant item covered by a
recording unit rectifier (semiconductor device,
separate schematic.
reproducer, sound FJ diode)
( c ) A multiapplication item.
reproducing unit selenium cell (rectifier)
( d ) Likely to be handled as a replace
rotator, field-polarization semiconductor device, diode
able item for maintenance pur
servomechanism, positional switch, semiconductor diode
poses.
sensor (transducer to electric thyristor (semiconductor diode-
power) type)
* Device function designations for power subassembly, separable or repair transducer, photoconductive
switchgear, industrial control, and industrial able varactor
equipment use are not covered by this standard. varistor, asymmetrical
For typical application of these device function telephone set
designations, see: telephone station
teleprinter FJ D C . . . coupler, directional
(a) American National Standard Manual and
Automatic Station Control, Supervisory, and As teletypewriter FJ
sociated Telemetering Equipments, C37.2-1962. DL . . . delay function
(b) NEMA Standard, Industrial Control, ICS- delay line
1
The class letter A is assigned on the basis
1970. that the item is separable or repairable. The slow-wave structure
(c) Joint Industrial Council Electrical Stan class letter U shall be used if the item is in
dards for Mass Production Equipment, EMP-1- separable or nonrepairable. DS . . . alarm, visual
1967, and General Purpose Machine Tools, 2
For economic reasons, assemblies which are annunciator F]
EGP-1-1967. fundamentally separable or repairable may not be audible signalling device
(d) Military Standard, Designations for Elec so provisioned but may be supplied as complete
tric Power Switchgear Devices and Industrial assemblies. However, the class letter A shall be bell, electrical
Control Devices, MIL-STD-27A. retained. buzzer

70
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 22 SECTION 22
22.4 Class Designation Letters 22.4
to P U to PU

device, indicating (excluding FL . . . filter LS . . . horn, electrical Zl


meter or thermometer) loudspeaker
drop, electrically restored G . . . . amplifier, rotating (regulating loudspeaker-microphone
drop, manually restored generator) reproducer, sound
flasher (circuit interrupter) chopper, electronic speaker
indicator (excluding meter or exciter (rotating machine) transducer, underwater sound
frequency changer (rotating)
thermometer) El
generator . . . . clock
lamp
hand generator coulomb accumulator
lamp, cold cathode
magneto, ignition counter, electrical
lamp, fluorescent Zl
magneto, telephone electrochemical step-function de
lamp, glow
regulating generator vice
lamp, incandescent E)
vibrator, interrupter F ] gage El
lamp, indicating
instrument
lamp, pilot
H* . . .hardware (common fasteners, etc) meter
lamp, signal
oscillograph
light source, general HP* ..hydraulic part
oscilloscope
neon lamp
outdoor metering device
ringer, telephone F] HR . . . heater
recorder, elapsed-time
signal light lamp, heating
register, message
siren lamp, infrared
sounder, telegraph resistor, heating strain gage
vibrator, indicating thermometer
visual signalling device HS . . . handset timer, electric
operator s set MG . . . converter (rotating machine)
* . . . antenna dynamotor
antenna, loop H T . . . earphone El inverter (motor-generator)
antenna, radar headset, electrical motor-generator
arrester, lighting F ] receiver, hearing-aid
bimetallic strip receiver, telephone MK . . . hydrophone
block, telephone protector receiver, telephone handheld microphone
brush, electrical contact receiver, telephone headset transmitter, telephone
carbon block
cell, aluminum or electrolytic HY . . . circulator MP* . .brake
cell, conductivity directionally selective clutch
contact, electrical El transmission device frame
core, adjustable tuning hybrid coil (telephone usage) gyroscope
core, electromagnetic junction, hybrid interlock, mechanical
core, inductor magic mechanical part
core, memory network, hybrid circuit El mounting (not electrical circuit,
core, transformer not a socket)
counterpoise, antenna J connector, receptacle, electrical El part, miscellaneous mechanical
dipole antenna disconnecting device (connector, (bearing, coupling, gear, shaft)
ferrite bead rings receptacle) part, structural
film element jack reed, vibration
gap (horn, protective, or sphere) receptacle (connector, stationary tuning fork
Hall element portion)
waveguide flange (choke) MT . . . detector, primary
Hall generator
transducer
igniter gap . . . . contactor (magnetically operated) transducer, measuring
insulator El relay ] transducer, mode
loop antenna relay, armature
magnet, permanent El relay, solenoid N 3
. . . . subdivision, equipment
part, miscellaneous electrical relay, reed
post, binding El relay, thermal connector, plug, electrical
protector, network disconnecting device (connector,
protector gap L choke coil
p!ug)
protector, telephone coil (all not classified as trans
plug (connector, movable por
rotary joint (microwave) formers) El
tion)
shield, electrical coil, magnetic blowout
waveguide flange (plain)
shield, optical coil, operating
short (coaxial transmission) coil, radio-frequency F ] PS . . . . inverter, static (dc to ac)
spark gap coil, relay power supply
splice coil, telephone loading El rectifier (complete power-supply
terminal (individual) coil, telephone retardation El assembly)
terminal, circuit electromagnetic actuator thermogenerator
termination, cable field, generator
valve element field, motor PU . . . eraser, magnetic
inductor erasing head
EQ . . . equalizer inductor, shunt head (with various modifiers)
network, equalizing reactor (iron core) head, sound recorder
reactor, saturable-core head, sound reproducer
saturable reactor
F fuse 3 solenoid, electrical Not a class letter, but used to identify a
3

fuse cutout winding F ] subdivision of an equipment in the Location


limiter, current (for power cable) winding, field Numbering Method.

71
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 22 SECTION 22
22.4 Q to Class Designation Letters 22.4 Q to
22.5 22.5

pickup T C . . . thermocouple artificial line (other than delay


recording head thermocouple, semiconductor line)
reproducing head thermopile balun
carrier-line trap
Q . . . . transistor FJ TP 4
. . . test point cavity, tuned FJ
rectifier, semiconductor controlled discontinuity (usually coaxial or
switch, semiconductor controlled TR . . . transmitter, radio FJ
waveguide transmission use)
thyratron (semiconductor device) U * . . integrated circuit package
1
gyrator
thyristor (semiconductor triode) mode suppressor
(see microcircuit
also micromodule network, general (where specific
R magnetoresistor
A* nonrepairable assembly class letters do not fit)
potentiometer
and photon-coupled isolator network, phase-changing FJ
potentiometer, function
22.2.4 resonator (tuned cavity)
resistor FJ
resistor, adjustable shifter, directional phase (nonre-
V . . . . cell, light-sensitive ciprocal)
resistor, nonlinear cell, photoemissive
resistor, variable FJ shifter, phase
cell, photosensitive tuned circuit
rheostat FJ counter tube, Geiger-Muller
shunt, instrument FJ tuner, E-H
counter tube, proportional
shunt, relay tuner, multistub
detector, nuclear-radiation (gas
tuner, slide-screw
RE . . . receiver, radio FJ filled)
electron tube FJ 22.5 Item Names: Alphabetical List
RT . . . ballast lamp ion-diffusion device
ballast tube ionization chamber The index to this standard shows the class
lamp, resistance klystron designation letter as applicable under the
resistor, current-regulating magnetron general rules, together with the item
resistor, thermal 11 phototube number of the representative graphic
temperature-sensing element photoelectric cell FJ symbol.
thermistor resonator tube (cavity-type)
solion
RV . . . resistor, voltage-sensitive FJ thyratron (electron tube)
Varistor, symmetrical traveling-wave-tube
voltage regulator (electron tube)
S contactor (manually, mechanical
ly or thermally operated)
dial, telephone FJ V R . . . diode, breakdown
disconnecting device (switch) regulator, voltage (excluding elec
governor (electrical contact type) FJ tron tube) FJ
interlock, safety, electrical stabistor
key-switch (telephone usage) voltage regulator (semiconductor
key, telegraph FJ device)
speed regulator (electrical con voltage regulator, induction
tact type)
W . . . bus bar F J
switch FJ
cable
switch, hook FJ
cable assembly (with connectors)
switch, interlock FJ
cable, coaxial
switch, reed
conductor
thermal cutout (circuit inter
dielectric path
rupter)
distribution line
thermostat
Goubau line
SQ . . . link, fusible transmission line
link, sensing transmission line, strip-type
squib, electric FJ transmission path
squib, explosive waveguide FJ
squib, igniter wire FJ

SR . . . slip ring W T . . tiepoint, wiring


ring, electrical contact FJ
X fuseholder FJ
rotating contact
lampholder FJ
autotransformer socket FJ
coil, telephone induction FJ
Y crystal unit, piezoelectric
coil, telephone repeating FJ
coupler, linear crystal unit, quartz FJ
taper, coaxial oscillator (excluding electron
taper, waveguide tube)
transformer F] oscillator, magnetostriction
transformer, current resonator, tuning-fork FJ
transformer, potential
Not a class letter, but commonly used to
4

TB . . . block, connecting designate test points for maintenance purposes.


strip, terminal See American National Standard Y14.15-1966.
Not a class letter, but commonly used to
s

terminal board FJ designate a tiepoint on connection diagrams.


test block See American National Standard Y14.15-1966.

72
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
SECTION 23 Revision of SECTION 23
23.1 23.1
American National Standards Referred
to in This Document

23.1 Referenced Standards*

When the following American National


Standards are superseded by a revision
approved by the American National
Standards Institute, the revision shall ap
ply:

American National Standard Reference


Designations for Electrical and Electron
ics Parts and Equipments, Y32.16-1968
and Supplement No. 1 ( 1 )

American National Standard Graphic


Symbols for Logic Diagrams, Y32.14-
1962 ( 2 )

American National Standard Drafting


Practices (Electrical and Electronics Di
agrams), Y14.15-1966 ( 1 )

American National Standard Abbrevia


tions for Use on Drawings, Z32.13-1950
(2)

American National Standard Manual and


Automatic Station Control, Supervisory,
and Associated Telemetering Equip
ments, C37.2-1962 ( 2 )

American National Standard Dimensions


of Caps, Plugs, and Receptacles, C73.10-
1966 through C73.44-1966

For Military Applications:


(1) Refer to the latest edition adopted for
mandatory use by the Department of Defense.
(2) Refer to the following military standards
(latest edition at time of invitation to bid) in
lieu of the American National Standard:
ANSI C37.2-1962 (in part): use MIL-STD-27
Designations for Electric Power Switchgear
Devices and Industrial Control Devices.
ANSI Z32.12-1950: use MIL-STD-12 Abbre
viations for Use on Drawings, Specifica
tions, Standards, and in Technical Docu
ments.
ANSI Y32.14-1962: use MIL-STD-806B or
MIL-STD-00806C (Navy) Graphic Sym
bols for Logic Diagrams.
(3) The following documents are listed for
purposes of information only;
MIL-STD-100 Engineering Drawing Practices.
MIL-M-24100 Manuals, Technical: Symbolic
Integrated Maintenance Manual (SIMM)
for Equipment and Systems; Preparation of.
Federal Cataloging Handbook H6-1, Section A.

73
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
APPENDIXES A A N D An i w i n # l v o c APPENDIXES A A N D
Cross Reference List of / V p p C H U l A C C Reference List of
r o s s

Changed Item Numbers . , . . . . , , , , - , , Changed Item Numbers


and IEC Data ( f u e s e A p p e n d i x e s are not part o t A m e r i c a n National Standard G r a p h i c j JEC a n ( D A T A

S y m b o l s for Electrical and Electronics D i a g r a m s ( I n c l u d i n g R e f e r e n c e


D e s i g n a t i o n Class Designation L e t t e r s ) Y32.2-1970, but are included
t o facilitate its u s e . )

Appendix A
Cross R e f e r e n c e List o f C h a n g e d I t e m N u m b e r s

USAS Y 3 2 . 2 - 1 9 6 7 ANSI Y 3 2 . 2 - 1 9 7 0 USAS Y 3 2 . 2 - 1 9 6 7 ANSI Y 3 2 . 2 - 1 9 7 0


1.7.3 1.7.4 15.1.1.2 15.1.2.2
1.7.4 1.7.5 15.1.1.3 15.1.2.5
3.1.9 3.1.9.1 15.1.1.4 15.1.2.4
3.1.10 3.1.10.1 15.1.1.5 15.1.2.3
3.2 3.2.2 15.1.2 15.1.3
. 5.7.2 5.7.3 15.1.2.1 15.1.3.1
5.7.3 5.7.4 15.1.2.2 15.1.3.3
7.5 7.7 15.1.2.3 15.1.3.2
8.5.6.3 8.5.6.4 15.1.2.4 15.1.3.4
8.5.8 8.5.8.1 15.1.2.5 15.1.3.5
11.1.1 11.1.5 15.4.5 15.8.4.1
15.1.1 15.1.2 15.8.1 15.8.5
15.1.1.1 15.1.2.1 15.8.2 15.8.6

Appendix
Reference Data

International E l e c t r o t e c h n i c a l C o m m i s s i o n ( I E C ) P u b l i c a t i o n 117
Recommended Graphical Symbols

The following d o c u m e n t s w e r e u s e d for the listing of the IEC symbol (He )


next t o those g r a p h i c symbols in this standard that are c o n s i d e r e d to b e in
a c c o r d a n c e with the g r a p h i c symbols in Publication 117.

PUB 117- 1 Kind of current, distribution systems, meth 117- 6 Variability, examples of resistors, elements
ods of connection and circuit symbols (1960) of electronic tubes, valves, and rectifiers
Amendment 1 (August 1966) (1964)
Amendment 2 (August 1967) Amendment 1 (August 1966)
117- 2 Machines, transformers, primary cells, and Amendment 2 (December 1967)
accumulators ( 1 9 6 0 ) 117- 7 Semiconductor devices, capacitors (1966)
Amendment 1 (August 1966) Amendment 1 (November 1968)
117- 3 Contacts, switchgear, mechanical controls, 117- 8 Architectural diagrams (1967)
starters, and elements of electromechanical 117- 9 Telephony, telegraphy, and transducers
relays (1963) (1968)
Amendment 1 (August 1966) Amendment 1 Block symbols for recorders
Amendment 2 (November 1968) and reproducers (1968)
117- 4 Indicating instruments and electric clocks 117-10 Aerials (antennas) and radio stations
(1963) (1968)
117- 5 Generating stations and substations, lines Amendment 1 Symbols for space service
for transmission and distribution (1963) stations (November 1968)
Amendment 1 (November 1968) 117-11 Microwave technology (1968)
117-12 Frequency spectrum diagrams (1968)
117-13 Block symbols for transmission (November
1968)

74

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
APPENDIX C APPENDIX C
Revised or
Appendix C Revised or
Deleted Symbols Revised or Deleted Symbols Deleted Symbols

Recommended Recommended
Symbols in Symbols in
Symbols Formerly in ANSI Y32.2- Symbols Formerly in ANSI Y32.2-
USAS Y32.2-1967 1970, if Not USAS Y32.2-1967 1970, if Not
Otherwise Otherwise
Specified Specified

Modified See item Revised and Expanded See items


1.7.2 4.21

1.7.2 Both ways through


4.21 Thermostat 4.21.7
TE7= --

OR
Ambient-temperature-operated device.

> See Note 1 . 7 . 1 A Operates on rising temperature.


4.21.1 With break contact
See also item 4.20.2
Expanded See item
2 . 1 . 1 2

2.1.12 Thermistor OR
Thermal resistor FJ

2.1.12.1 General
4.21.2 With make contact
"" See also item 4.20.2

2.1.12.2 With independent integral


OR
heater

-DO*
4.21.3 With integral heater and trans
fer contacts

Revised See item


Deleted See item
2.8
4.30
2.8 Permanent Magnet
4.30 Relay 3
]
lJ 1 fFO Fast-operate
fFR Fast-release
Revised See item
3.1.9

3.1.9$ Coaxial cable, recognition Revised and Expanded See items


symbol 4 . 3 0 . 5
Coaxial transmission path through
Radio-frequency cable FJ 4.30.5 Thermal relay fJ 4 . 3 0 . 6
(coaxial)
~ -
i L
OR
N O T E 3.1.9A: I f n e c e s s a r y f o r c l a r i t y , a n o u t e r -
conductor connection t o the s y m b o l , shall be m a d e o-i- -=Nr-
w h e n t h e b r o k e n line is shown.
OR O R

-TLr OR -OO
^ See Note 3 . 1 . 9 A o-i- ^ N r

75

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
APPENDIX C APPENDIX C
Revised or Revised or Deleted Symbols Revised or
Deleted Symbols Deleted Symbols

Recommended Recommended
Symbols in Symbols in
Symbols Formerly in ANSI Y32.2- Symbols Formerly in ANSI Y32.2-
USAS Y32.2-1967 1970, if Not USAS Y32.2-1967 1970, if Not
Otherwise Otherwise
Specified Specified

Revised See item Revised See items


5.6.2 7.3.6 Cathode-ray tube 7.3.6
7.3.6.1 With electric-field deflection through
5.6.2 Coaxial with the outside con 7.3.6.2.2
ductor shown carried through

7.3.6.2 For magnetic deflection


Revised See item
5.6.3
5.6.3 Application: Coaxial with out
side conductor shown carried through;
with outside conductor terminated on
chassis
Revised See item
8.6.15
8.6.15 Thyristor, bidirectional triode
type; triac; gated switch

Revised See item Style 3 ( g )


5.6.4
5.6.4 Application: Coaxial with cen
ter conductor shown carried through; Revised and Expanded See item
outside conductor not carried through 9.1.3

-so? 9.1.2 High-voltage primary fuse cut


out, dry

m
OR
Revised See item
5.7.1
5.7.1 Mated (general)

yy See Note 5.7A

Revised and Expanded See item


9.1.2
Deleted See item
5.7.4 9.1.4 With alarm contact
5.7.4 Application: mated choke When fuse blows, alarm bus A is con
flanges in rectangular waveguide line nected to power bus B. Letters are for
explanation and are not part of the
"BOfl- symbol.

Revised See item


5.7.5
- T

I FC
. '

LOAD
5.7.5 Application: rectangular wave OR
guide with mated plain and choke
flanges with direct-current isolation (in LOAD \6

sulation) between sections of wave


guide.

OR
LOAD

76

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
APPENDIX C APPENDIX C
Revised or Revised or Deleted Symbols Revised or
Deleted Symbols Deleted Symbols

Recommended Recommended
Symbols in Symbols in
Symbols Formerly in ANSI Y32.2- Symbols Formerly in ANSI Y32.2-
USAS Y32.2-1967 1970, if Not USAS Y32.2-1967 1970, if Not
Otherwise Otherwise
Specified Specified

Revised See item Deleted See item


10.4.1 15.8.4.1
10.4.1 General 15.4.5.1 Application: circulator, re
versible direction
The polarity symbol (item 1.6) must
-LH H= be used with the electromagnet symbol
to indicate proper direction flow.
Revised See item
15.2.4
15.2.4 Coupling by loop from coaxial
to circular waveguide with direct-cur
rent grounds connected

Revised See item


15.5.3 Application: transducer from 15.5.3
Revised See item rectangular waveguide to coaxial with
15.2.7 mode suppression and direct-current
15.2.7 Coupling by probe from co grounds connected.
axial to rectangular waveguide with

h
direct-current grounds connected

Revised See item


15.7.1.1
Revised See items 15.7.1.1 Application: coaxial type in
15.3.2 rectangular waveguide system
15.3.2 Application: -plane aperture through
coupling, 30-decibel transmission loss 15.3.6
-BOB-

15.3.3 Application: loop coupling, 30- Deleted See item


decibel transmission loss 15.8.1
15.8.3 Unidirectional (isolator)
Power flowing in direction of arrow is
not intentionally attenuated.
15.3.4 Application: probe coupling,
30-decibel transmission loss

X I - ""
15.3.5 Application: resistance cou Revised See item
pling, 30-decibel transmission loss 15.9.2

15.9.2 Application: resonator with


- mode suppression coupled by an E-
plane aperture to a guided transmis
Revised sion path and by a loop to a coaxial path
15.4.4.1 Application: 5-arm circular See item
hybrid with principal coupling in the 15.4.4.1
plane and with 1-arm coupling using
rectangular waveguide

77

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
APPENDIX C APPENDIX C
Revised or Revised or Deleted Symbols Revised or
Deleted Symbols Deleted Symbols

Recommended Recommended
Symbols in Symbols in
Symbols Formerly in ANSI Y32.2- Symbols Formerly in ANSI Y32.2-
USAS Y32.2-1967 1970, if Not USAS Y32.2-1967 1970, if Not
Otherwise Otherwise
Specified Specified

Revised See item Revised See item


15.9.3 15.14.2
15.9.3 Application: tunable resonator 15.14.2 Forward-wave traveling-
having adjustable Q coupled by a probe wave-tube amplifier shown with four
to a coaxial system grids, having slow-wave structure with
attenuation, magnetic focusing by ex
ternal permanent magnet, rf input and
rf output coupling, each by inductive
coupling

Revised See item


15.11.1
15.11.1 Resonant type with coaxial
output

Revised See item
15.14.3
15.14.3 Forward-wave traveling-
wave-tube amplifier shown with four
grids, having slow-wave structure with
attenuation, external electromagnetic
focusing, rf input and rf output coup
Revised lingeach by external cavity and loop
See item
coupling, to a coaxial path
15.12.2
15.12.2 Double-cavity klystron, inte
gral c a v i t y , permanent externally-
ganged tuning, loop coupled (coupling

loop may be shown inside if desired)
See item 7.1.7.1.

c
f

Revised See item Revised See item


15.14.1 15.14.4
15.14.1 Forward-wave traveling- 15.14.4 Forward-wave traveling-
wave-tube amplifier shown with four wave-tube amplifier shown with four
grids, having slow-wave structure with grids, having slow-wave structure with
attenuation, magnetic focusing by ex attenuation, magnetic focusing by ex
ternal permanent magnet, rf input and ternal permanent magnet, rf input and
rf output coupling, each by E-plane rf output coupling, each by direct con
aperture to external rectangular wave nection from slow-wave structure to a
guide coaxial path

78

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
APPENDIX C APPENDIX C
Revised or Revised or Deleted Symbols Revised or
Deleted Symbols Deleted Symbols

Recommended Recommended
Symbols in Symbols in
Symbols Formerly in ANSI Y32.2- Symbols Formerly in ANSI Y32.2-
USAS Y32.2-1967 1970, if Not USAS Y32.2-1967 1970, if Not
Otherwise Otherwise
Specified Specified

Revised See item Deleted See item


15.14.6 16.1.1
15.14.6 Backward-wave traveling- 16.1.1.3 Additional letter combina
wave-tube amplifier shown with two tions, as follows, may be employed, but
grids, having slow-wave structure with the use of specific graphic symbols in
attenuation, sole (beam-aligning elec cluded elsewhere in this standard is
trode), magnetic focusing by external preferred
permanent magnet, rf input and rf out
put coupling, each by -plane aperture AR Amplifier FJ
to external rectangular waveguide Attenuator
AT
C Capacitor FJ
CB Circuit breaker FJ
HS Handset FJ
I Indicating or switchboard
lamp
L Inductor
J Jack
LS Loudspeaker FJ
Revised ' See item MIC Microphone FJ
15.14.7 ose Oscillator
15.14.7 Backward-wave traveling- PAD Pad
wave-tube oscillator shown with two Plug
grids, having slow-wave structure with HT Receiver, headset
attenuation, sole (beam-aligning elec
trode), magnetic focusing by external Relay FJ
permanent magnet, rf output coupling R Resistor FJ
by inductive coupling s Switch FJ or key switch
Transformer 9
WR Wall receptacle

Revised See item


15.14.8
15.14.8 Backward-wave traveling-
wave-tube oscillator shown with two
grids, having slow-wave structure with
attenuation, sole (beam-aligning elec
trode), magnetic focusing by external
permanent magnet, rf output coupling
by inductive coupling, with slow-wave
structure connected internally to
collector

|D*]

79

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
APPENDIX D Appendix D APPENDIX D
Revised or - i i r , Revised or
Deleted Symbols R e v i s e d D e l e t e d S y m b o l s Deleted Symbols

Recommended Recommended
Symbols Formerly in Symbols in Symbols Formerly in Symbols in
USA Standard Y32.2-1962 & ANSI Y32.2- USA Standard Y32.2-1962 & ANSI Y32.2-
Supplement Y32.2A-1964 1970, if Not Supplement Y32.2a-1964 1970, if Not
or MIL-STD-15-1A Otherwise or MIL-STD-15-1A Otherwise
(including original item numbers) Specified (including original item numbers) Specified

Deleted Corrected
See ANSI See item 3.1.8.4
11.3.1 On a connection or wiring dia 58.8.4 Shielded 2-conductor cable with
Y14.15-1966
gram, a 3-pole single-throw circuit breaker shield grounded

~I~
(with terminals shown) may be drawn as
shown below ,
o o o

o o o Corrected
71.2.1 Resonator with mode suppression See item 15.9.2
See Note 11.3 A
coupled b y an -plane aperture to a guided
FOR CONNECTION OR W I R I N G
transmission path and by a loop to a co
DIAGRAM
axial path.

Corrected
See item 15.12.2
34.11.10.2 Double-cavity klystron, in
tegral cavity, permanent external-ganged
tuning, loop coupled (coupling loop may
be shown inside if desired) See item 34.8.1.

Revised See item


4.13.7
76.12.7 Wafer, 3-pole 3-circuit with 2
nonshorting and 1 shorting moving con
tacts
Viewed from end opposite control knob
or actuator unless otherwise indicated.
Revised and Expanded For more than one section, section No. 1
See item 6.3 is nearest control knob.
42.7 Saturable-core inductor (reactor)
When contacts are on both sides, front
Polarity marks may be added to direct-
contacts are nearest control knob.
current winding.
Explanatory words and arrow are not
part of the symbol shown. dc WINDING

Revised See item 12.1


48 Meter
Instrument
Temperature meter Deleted See ANSI
Y14.15-
81.5 Applications 1966
Corrected NOTE 81.6A: If the device terminale are in a circular
See item 15.5.3
arrangement, the actual angular spacing between the
53.3 Application: transducer from rectang terminals should b e approximated on the terminal
ular waveguide to coaxial with mode sup diagram.
pression and direct-current grounds con NOTE 81.6B: If the terminals are in an essentially
nected 11 linear arrangement the terminal diagram may show
the terminals in either a linear array along one side of
the elongated envelope symbol (preferable), or within
a maximum angle of 160 degrees around the circular
envelope symbol.
NOTE 81.5C: If pins are omitted in an otherwise
standard terminal arrangement, d o not respace the
remaining pins.
NOTE 81.5D: A terminal at the center of the termi
Corrected
nal arrangement shall be identified as the C E N T E R
58.8.2 Coaxial cable, recognition sym- See item 3.1.9 terminal lead or pin.
Coaxial transmission path NOTE 81.6E: The typical examples show pin num
bering in accordance with standard industry practice,
Cable, radio frequency FJ , (Co i.e., with the terminals viewed from outside the ter
axial) See item 58.1. minal face of the device.

80

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
APPENDIX D APPENDIX D
Revised or Revised or Deleted Symbols Revised or
Deleted Symbols Deleted Symbols

Recommended Recommended
Symbols Formerly in Symbols Formerly in
Symbols in Symbols in
USA Standard Y32.2-1962 & USA Standard Y32.2-1962 &
ANSI ANSI
Supplement Y32.2a-1964 Supplement Y32.2a-1964
Y32.2-1970 if Y32.2-I970 if
or MIL-STD-15-1A or MIL-STD-15-1A
Not Otherwise Not Otherwise
(including original item numbers) (including original item numbers)
Specified Specified

Deleted (Continued)
Deleted (Continued) See ANSI See ANSI
Y14.15- 81.5.7 Device with 8-terminal keyed Y14.15-
1966 (such as octal) base, rigid envelope termi 1966
81.5.1 Two-terminal device with one
flexible lead and one rigid terminal con nal, and metallic envelope connected to
nected to a metallic envelope (typical semi base terminal (typical triode-heptode
conductor diode shown). shown).

81.5.2 Two-terminal device with rigid


terminals and reference point located at
one of the terminals (typical semiconduc 81.5.8 Device with keyed (such as oc
tor diode shown). tal) base having design capability of 8
pins but with 2 pins omitted, and with 3
rigid envelope terminale (typical disc-seal
tri ode shown).
81.5.3 Three-terminal device with circu
lar arrangement of pin terminals with base
orientation determined by gap in pin spac
ing (typical transistor shown).
81.5.9 Device with 9-terminal (such as
noval) base utilizing gap in pin spacing to
establish base orientation (typical twin
triode shown).
81.5.4 Three-terminal device with rigid
terminals, one connected to the metallic
enclosure, and index pin (typical transistor
shown).

Revised
See items 1.2.1
84 Thermistor and 12.1
81.5.5 Four-terminal device with in-line Resistor, Thermal El
pin terminals, one connected to metallic "T" indicates that the primary character
envelope, and reference point (typical tran istic of the element within the circle is a
sistor shown). function of temperature.

Revised
See item 2.1.12.1

84.1 General

Revised
See item 8.8.1

81.5.6 Five-terminal device with in-line 85.2.1 Temperature-measuring semicon


terminal leads, one connected to metallic ductor thermocouple
enclosure and reference point (typical relay
shown).

Corrected See item 6.4.1.1

86.1.1 Application: transformer with di


rect-current connections and mode suppres
sion between two rectangular waveguides

7*V

81

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
A C MACHINE AC MACHINE
Index
CLOCK CLOCK
N O T E : T h i s index contains c o m m o n l y a c c e p t e d or standard item
n a m e s as used in the list of s y m b o l s , as w e l l as s o m e colloquial
n a m e s . Certain of these n a m e s m a y not appear u n d e r the item
listing.
Class Class
Name Item No. Letter Name Item No. Letter
AC N A C H I N t 13.06 B.G I CARBON 9.3.2
C NACH INE i3.o; B,G CONNECTING 5.1.1.1 TB
AC R E L A Y A . 30 TELEPHONE PROTECTOR 9.3.2
>C S O U R C E , G E N E R A L 2.7 IEST 5.
ACMVE SPACE-STATION 20.2.2 BLOCK I N S L A Y E R CELL B.T.3 BT
ACTUATING DEVICE 2.1A.I RLOWOUT C O I L A.A L
ACYCLIC GENERATOR 13.*.19 G B O A R D , TERMINAL 5.1.1.1 TB
ADAPTER, CONNECTOR 5.6.5 CP BOLOMETER 2.1.11.3 AT
ADJUSTABILITY, EXTRINSIC 1.1.1 BOOSTER A M P L I F I E R 16.2.1 AR
GENfcRAL 1.1.1.1 BRAKE IA.3 BP
L I NEAR 1.1.1.3 BREAK CONTACT A.3.1 S
N O H L I N E AR l.l.l.A BREAK S W I T C H A.07.02 s
PRESET 1.1.1.2 BREAK SWITCH A.09.02 s
ADJUSTABLE HRFAK SWITCH A.10.02 s
CONTACT A.2.2.1 BREAKDOWN D E V I C E 8.3.1
GAIN AMPLIFIER 16.2.5 BREAKDOWN D I O O E ,
IN STEPS 1.1.3.2 BIDIRECTIONAL 8.5.6.2 VR
INDUCTANCE 6.2.A UNIDIRECTIONAL B.5.6.1 VR
NON-LINEAR V A R I A B I L I T Y 1.1.1.A UREAKER, CIRCUIT 9.OA CB
PHASE S H I F T E R 16.6.3 BRIDGE R E C T I F I E R 16.3.3 CR
RE S I S T O R 2.1.3 BRIDGING AMPLIFIER 16.2.1
TRANSFORMER 6.A.9 rtRUSH-SHIFT ING MOTOR 13.5.H-.13
AERIAL 2.3 BRUSHES 13.1.5
A I R C I R C U I T BREAKtR 9. A. 2 CB SUCHHOLZ RELAY 9.5.12.19
A I R CORE 6 . 1. 1 BUS BAR 3.1.1.1
A I R PATH 3.1.3 BUSHING, CAPACITANCE 2.2.IA
AIR TRANSMISSION PATH 3.1.3
A I R , R E C O G N I T I O N SYMBOL I.A. 1 BUER 10.1.2
ALARM,
AUDIBLE 10.1 CABLE 3.1
CONTACT 9.1. A COAXIAL 3.1.9
VISUAL 11.2 SHIELDED 3.01.08.01
ALTERNATE WIRING 3.3 SHIELDED 3.01.08.03
A L T E R N A T I N G CURRENT ( T E L E G R A P H REPEATER I 20.A.A.3 TERMINATION 5.2
A L T E R N A T I N G CURRENT GENERATOR 13.1.2.2 G UNDERGROUND 3.2
A L T E R N A T I N G C U R R E N T MOTOR 13.1.3.2 CABLE ASSEMBLY 3.1.1

A L T E R N A T I N G - ANO D I R E C T - C U R R E N T CUMPOSITE CABLE UNDERGROUND 3.2.2
MACHINES 13.7 CAM-OPERATED MASTER SWITCH A.13.10
MG
A L T E R N A T I N G - C U R R E N T MACHINES 13.OS CAPACITIVE
B.G
A L T E R N A T I N G - C U R R E N T MACHINES 13.06 DIODE 8.5.2
B.G
A L T E R N A T I N G - C U R R E N T SOURCE 2.7 INDICATOR 8. 3. A
A M B I E N T - T E M P E R A T U R E - O P ERA T E D D E V I C E A.21 CAPACITIVE TERMINATION 2.2.10 AT
AMMETER 12. 1 CAPACITOR 2.2 C
AMPERE-HOUR METER 12.1 BUSHING 2.2.IA
A M P L I DYNE 13.OA.20 COUPLING 2.2.11 C
AMPLIOYNE 13.OA.22 DIFFERENTIAL 2.2.6 C
A M P L I F I ER 16.2 ELECTROLYTIC 2.2.2 C
A M P L I F I E R - T Y P E TELEPHONE SET 20.6.10 FEEO-THROUGH 2.2.12 C
AMPLIFIER, OPERATIONAL 17.1 FIXED 2.2.1 c
AMPLIFIER. ROTATING PHASE-SHIFTER 2.2.7 c
13.A.20
PULARIZEO 2.2.2 c
A M P L I F I E R , SUMMING 17.2
POTENTIAL OEVICE 2.2.16 c
ANALOG F U N C T I U N S 17.1 c
ANNUNCIATUR SHIELDED 2.2.3
11.2.1 c
SHUNT 2.2.9
ANUDE, E L E C T R O N TUBE 7.1.3.1 c
SPLIT-STATUR 2.2.8
ANODE, TARGET 7.1.3.2 c
TERMINATING 2.2.10
ANOOE t - K A Y T U B E 7.1.3.2 c
VARIABLE 2.2.A
ANTENNA 2. 3
CARBON BLOCK 9.3.2
ANTENNA-COUNTERPOISE 2.3.A
C A R R I E R C U R R E N T , GENERAL 9.5.8
APERTURE COUPLING 15.2.1 CP CARRIER P I L O T 9.5.12.16
A P P L I C A T I O N S , SEMICONDUCTOR B.5
CARRIER-COUPLING CAPACITOR 2.2.16
APPLICATIONS, TRANSISTOR e.6 C A R R I E R - L I N E TRAP 6.2.
ARMATURE ( C O M M U T A T O R AND B R U S H E S ) 11.1.5 CATHODE RAY TUBES 7.3.6
ARRESTER,
C A T H O O E . COLD 7.1.1.3
E L E C T R I C SURGE 9.3 D I R E C T L Y HEATED 7.1.1.1
11CHINING 9.3 7.1.1
E L E C T R O N TUBE
ARROW ( A D J U S T A B L E 1 l.l 7.1.1.2
I N D I R E C T L Y HEATED
ASSOCIATED PATH 3.A 7.1.1.6
10NICALLY HEATEO
EOUIPMENT AA.10 7.1.1.A
PHOTO
ASYMMETRICAL WAVEGUIDE CONNECTORS 5.7.2 J.P 7.1.1.5
POOL
ATTENUATOR 2 . OA AT TAPPED 7.2.3
C A V I T Y RESUNATORS 15.10
AUDIBLE SIGNALING DEVICE 10. I C A V I T Y , TUNED 15.9
AUDIO CELL,
AMPLIFIER 16.2 ALUMINUM 9.3.3
L E V E L METER 12.1 BATTERY 2.5
METER 12.1 BLOCKING-LAYER 8.7.3
AUTOMATIC SWITCHING 20.3.2 ELECTROLYTIC 9.3.3
AUTOMATIC TRANSMITTER 20.5.7. PHOTOSENSITIVE 8.7
AUTOTRANSFORMER 6.. SOLAR 8.7.3
AVALANCHE DIODE 8.5.6.1 CELL, CONDUCTIVITY 7.6
CHASSIS 3.9.2
ACKWARD-WAVE T R A V E L L I N G - W A V E TUBE 15. I A . 6 - . 8 CHASSIS CONNECTION 3.9.2
ALANCE RELAY 9.5.5 CHOKE WAVEGUIDE FLANGES 5.7.3
BALANCED A T T E N U A T R 2.DA.02 AT CHOKE, COIL 6.2
BALANCED A T T E N U A T O R 2.OA.05 AT C I R C U I T C L O S I N G SWITCH A.07.01
BALANCED CURRENT RELAY 9.5.12.6 C I R C U I T C L O S I N G SWITCH A.09-01
B A L A N C E D S T K I PL INk 3.7.2 C I R C U I T C L O S I N G SWITCH A.10.01
B A L A N C E R , DC 13.A.15.16 G CIRCUIT OPENING SWITCH A.0T.02
B A L L - T Y P E ANNUNCIATOR 11.2.3 OS C I R C U I T O P E N I N G SWITCH A.09.02
B A L L A S T LAMP OR TUBE 11.1.1 RT C I R C U I T O P E N I N G SWITCH A.10.02
JALUN 15.15 2 CIRCUIT,
BAND E L I M I N A T I O N F I L T E R 16.1.1.2 FL BREAKER 9 . OA
HANU PASS F I L T E R 15.16.2 FL BREAKER, A I R 9.A.2
BAND P A S S F I L T E R 16.1.1.2 FL ELEMENT I GENERAL I 16.1.1
BARRIER PHOTOCELL 8.7.3 BT OPEN 3.8.1
BASE O R I E N T A T I O N D E V I C E 5.1.2.3 RETURN 3.9
BASE P I N T E R M I N A L S 5.1.2.1 SHORT 3.8.2
BASIC CONTACT ASSEMBLIES A.3 TERMINAL S.t.l
BATTERY 2.5 BT CIRCULAR
B E A D R I N G S , F RR I I t 15.18 HYBRID 15.A.A
BELL 10.1.1 OS WAVEGUIDE 3.6.1
B I F I L A R SLOW-WAVE STRUCTURE 2.6.3 OL WAVEGUIDE ROTARY J O I N T 15.7.1.2
BIMETALLIC STRIP 2.1A CIRCULATOR,
B I N D I N : POST 5.1.1 FIXED DIRECTION 15.A.5
B I P O L A R V O L T A G E LIITfc R 8.5.6.2 V REVERSIBLE DIRECTION 15.A.5.I
BLOCK C L O C K , CONTACT MAKING 12.1

82
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
CLOCKWISE ROTATION CLOCKWISE ROTATION
ELECTROCHEMICAL STEP-FUNCTION Index ELECTROCHEMICAL STEP-FUNCTION
DEVICE DEVICE
Class Class
Name Item No. Letter Name Item No. Letter
CLOCKWISE R O T A T I O N 1*.1.i COUPLING 15.2 CP
CLUTCH I*.3 MP COUPLING C A P A C I T O R 2.2.11 C
COAXIAL CROSSING O f PATHS 3.1.5
CABLE 3 . 1 . 9 CRYSTAL DIODE 8.5.1 CR
CONNECTORS 5.6 J.P CRYSTAL R E C T I F I E R .5.1 CR
RESONATOR CRYSTAL U N I T
1 5 . 9 . 1 1 2.10 Y
ROTARY J O I N T 1.T.I.I CURRENT
WAVEGUIOE 1.6.3 LIMITER 9.2 F
C O A X I A L STRUCTURE NOT M A I N T A I N E D 3 . 1 . 9 . 1 MEASURING I SEMICUNOUCTOR I THERMOCOUPLE ..2 TC
C O I L . ( S E E 1NUCT0AI MEASURING THERMOCOUPLE 2.13.2 TC
CHOKE 6.2 L MODIFIERS I.B
LOAOINS 6.2 L CURRENT REGULATOR DIODE 8.5.11 CR
MAGNETIC BLOWOUT 4 . 4 L CURRENT TRANSFORMER 6.4.18
N U L T I W I N O I N G 6 . 1 . 2 P O L A R I T Y MARKINGS 1.6.1.1
O R E RAI I N C 4. C U T O U T . PRIMARY FUSE 9.01.02 F
R E L A Y 6.05 C U T O U T . PRIMARY FUSE 9.01.03 f
RELAY 6 . 3 0 . 0 1 C U T O U T . THERMAL 4.22 OS
REPEAT INC 6.6 L OA&HPOT 4.30
R E T A R O A t l O N 6.2 DATA FLOH CODE S I G N A L S
c o l d cathode T . l . 1 . 3
I
OB MEIER
19.1
12.1
-
c o l o cathode lamp 11.1.3 OS DBM METER 12.1
c o l d cathode tube 7 . 1 . 4 V D C AMPLIFIER 16.2.1 AR
collecting a i d emitting electrode 7 . 1 .4 DC G E N E R A T O R , MOTOR 1 3 . 4 . I - , 1 0 S.G
a l te e l y c o l l e c t i n g a n o e m i t t i n g 7 . 1 . 4 . 2 OC MACHINES 11.4 B.G
DYNODE 7 . 1 . 4 . 1 D C SOURCE 2 . 5 . 1 BT
C O L L E C T I N G ELECTRUOE 7 . 1 .3 DECIBEL METER 12.1
ANUDE 7 . 1 . 3 . 1 DEFLECT ING ELECTRODE 7.1.2.2
(.DLL ECTOR T . 1 . 3 . 1 DELAY F U N C T I O N 2.6 DL
FLUORESCENT TARGET DELAY L I N E
PLATE
7 . 1 . 3 . 1 2.6 OL
7.1.3.1 DELTA CONNECTION 1.9.1
TAHGEI U E L I A I NO ING
X - R A Y ANODE
7 . 1 . 3 . 2
- OEMANO METER
11.1.5
: O L L E C I U R (SEMICONDUCTOR D E V I C E I .
PLURALITY Of
7 . 1 . 3 . 2
JE MANO T O T A L I Z I N G RELAY
12. 1
12. 1


B.2.5.1 Dt I t C I U R . PRIMARY 2.11 MT
SINGLE B.2.5 DEVICE,
COMBI N A T I U N S N I T C H 4.11 s ACTUATING 2.14.1
COMMON B A T T E R Y TELEPHONE S E T 2 0 . 6 . 3 A AUDIBLE S I G N A L I N G 10.1 OS
COMMON CONNECTIONS 3.9.3 DISCONNECTING 5.1 J.P.
COMMUNICATION SN1ICMBOARD-TYPE CONNECTOR 5.3.5 J , OUTDOOR METERING 6.4.21
COMMUNICATION S W I I C H B O A R O - T Y P E LAMP 11.2.6 OS SEMICONDUCTOR 8.1
CONHUTMING H t m 13.2.1 L VISUAL SIGNALING 11.2 OS
CONMUTA TOR 13.1.5 DIAL TELEPHONE 1 6 . 1 . 1 . 2 s
COMPENSATING F l E L 1 3.2.1 L D I A L - T Y P E TELEPHUNt SET 20.6.4 A
COMPOSITE MACHINES 1 3.7 MG O I A L , S N I T C H , T E L t PHONE 4 . 2 5 . 2 s
COMPOUND GENERATOR 1 3.4.13-14 G UI AME TR1CAL WINDING 11.1.6
COMPOUND HOI 3 1 3.4.9 D I E L E C T R I C PATH 1.1.4
COMPRESSION A M P L I F I E R 16.2. 1 AR 0 I E L E C T R I C - F 1 L L E O M E T A L L I C WAVEGUIDE 1.6.2.1
CONDENSER. SYNCHRONOUS 13.6. 1 D I F F E R E N T I A L CAPACITOR 2.2.6 c
CONDITIONAL HIRING 3.3 D I F F E R E N T I A L CURRENT RELAY 9.5.12.7
CONDUCTANCE 1 5 . 1 . 2 . 2 DIFFERENTIAL PHASE-SHIFTER 16.6.4
CONDUCTED P A T H 3.1.2 0 1 F F E R E N T I A L R E C E I V E R . TRANSMITTER 13.8.2 8
CONDUCTIVITY CELL 7.6 V DIFFERENTIAL RELAY 4.30
CONDUCTOR! S I 3.1 O I F F E R E N T I A L RELAY 9.05.06
ASSEHBL 3 . 1 .B D I G I T A L LUGIC C I R C U I T S
CR-
18.1
ASSOCIATED 3.1.7 D I O D E - T Y P E RING DEMODULATOR 16.8
SHIELDEU 3.1.B.1 D I O O E - T Y P E RING MODULATOR 16.8 CR
UNDERGROUND C A R L t 3.2
CONNECTIDN, D I O D E , BACKWARD 8.05.07.02 CR
CHASSIS 3.9.2 BREAKDOHN-BIOIRECTIONAL 8.5.6.2 VR
COMMON 3.9.3 BREAKDOHN-UNI D I R E C T I O N A L 8.5.6. 1 VR
FRAME 3.9.2 CAPACITIVE 8.5.6.2
MECHAN I CAL 14.1 CRYSTAL 8.5.1 CR
CONNECTOR 5. 3 J.P PHOTO 8.5.4 CR
ASYMHETRI CAL 5.7. 1 J.P PNPN SWITCH 8.5.8 CR
DISCONNECTING DEVICE 5.3 J , SEMICONDUCTOR 8.5.1 CR
SYMMETRICAL 5.7.2 J.P STORAGE 8.5.5 CR
WAVEGUIDE 5. 7 J.P TEMPERATURE DEPENDENT 8.5.3 CR
CONNECTOR ADAPTER 5.6.5 CP TUNNEL 8.5.7.1 CR
CONNECTOR, COMMUNICATION S H I T C H B O A K D - T Y P E 5.3.5 J.P J I P L E ANTENNA 2.1.2
CONNECTORS, C O A X I A L 5.6 J.P D I R E C T CURRENT A M P L I F I E R 16.2.1 AR
CONSTANT CURRENT TRANSFORMER 6.4.6 D I R E C T CURRENT GENERATOR 13.1.2.1 G
CONTACT ASSEMBLY. B A S I C 4.1 s D I R E C T CURRENT MACHINES 11.4 BG
CONTACT M A K E - B R E A K , TEA 12. 1 D I R E C T CURRtNT MOTOR 13.1.3.1
CONTACT M A K E - B R E A K , VOLTMETER D I R E C T CURRENT SOURCE
CONTACT,
12. 1 2.5.1 BT
D I R E C T I O N OF FLOW OF POWER, S I G N A L S . OR
BRIDGING 4 . 2 . 2 . 4 INFORMATION 1.7
ELECTRICAL 4.2 DIRECTION-FINDING KADI STATION 20.1.4
FIXED 4.2.1 D I R E C T I O N A L COUPLER 15.1 DC
LOCKING 4 . 2 . 2 . 2 D I R E C T I O N A L D I S T A N C E RELAY 9 . 5 . 1 2 . 9
MOV ING 4 . 2 . 2 D I R E C T I O N A L OVERCURRENT RELAY 9.5.4
NONLOCKING 4 . 2 . 2 . 3 D I R E C T I O N A L RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT RELAY 9.5.12.1
ROTATING D I R E C T L Y HEATED CATHODE
SPLIT-REED
4
4
.
.
2 . 2
2 . 2
. 7
. 6 J1SC0NNECTING DEVICE
.1.1.1
5. 1
-J . P . X
V I B R A T O R REEO 4 . 2 . 2 . 5 O I S C O N N E C I I N G SNITCH 4.6 s
CONTACTOR 4 . 29 K.s D I S C O N N E C T I N G SWITCH FUSE 9.1 F
CONTINUOUSLY A D J U S T A B L E DISCONTINUIIY
CUNTINUOUSLV A D J U S T A B L E INOUCTANCE
1.1.1.1
6.2.5
L DISSIMILAR-METALS DEVICE
15.1
2.13

TC
D I S T A N C E RELAY 9.5.12.8
CONTROL TRANSFORMER, SYNCHRO 11.B.I DISTRIBUTION LINE 3.2
CONTROL T R A N S M I T T E R 13. D I V I D E R . ELECTRONIC 17.5 A
C O N T R O L - D I F F E R E N T I A L TRANSMITTER 11. S DOUBLE HEADSET 10.4.2 HT
CONTRULLEU R E C T I F I E R 8.06.12.01 DOUBLE Z I G - Z A G CONNECTION 1.9.14
LONIROLLEO R E C T I F I E R B.06.11.01 J O U B L - B A S E DIODE 8.06.08 0
CUNIKLLE R E C T I F I E R 16.03.02 PS DOUBLE-BASE DIODE .06.09
CONTROLLING ELECTRODE D O U B L E - B I A S E D RELAY
B E A M - C D N F I N I N G OK B E A N - F O R H I N G
7.1.2
7.1.2.1
J O U B L E - C U R R E N T I TELEGRAPH REPEATER I
4.30
20.4.4.1


DEFLECTING
EXCITOR
7 . 1 . 2 . 2
DOUBLE-CURRENT GENERATOR 13.4.18 G
GRID
7.1.24
D O U B L E - D E L T A CONNECTION 1.9.11
7.1.21
D O U B L E - D E L I A WINOING 13.3.7

DOUBLE-THROW SWITCH
I f . N I TOR 7.1.2.1 4 . 6 . 2 S
R E F L E C T I N G 3A R E P E L L I N G
C O N T R O L L I N G R A D I O STAT1QN
7 . 1 . 2 . 2
DROP 11.2.2-8 OS
CONVENIENCE O U T L E T S
20.1.6
5.4
j
DRUM SWITCH
J U P L E X 1 TELEGRAPH 1
4.11.11
2 0 . 5 . 5
s
C O N V E R T E R t MOTOR 11.7.5 MG DUPLEX TELEGRAPH REPEATER 20.4.3
CORE 6.1 DYNAMOTOR 11.4.17 MG
AIR 6 . 1 . 1 E - TUNER 15.1.5
MAGNET 6.1.1 - P L A N E COUPLING 15.2.1 CP
MAGNETIC 6 . 1 . 2 EARPHONE 10.4 HT
COULOMB ACCUMULATOR 7.5 EARTH-STATION
COUNTER. E L E C T R O M A G N E T I C A L L V O P E R A T E D 12.2 E L E C T R I C BELL
2 0 . 2 . 4
10.1.1

OS
C O U N T E R P O I S E . ANTENNA 2.1.4 E L E C T R I C HORN 10.1.3 LS
COUPLED TUNABLE RESONATOR 1 5 . 9 . 2 - . 4 E L E C T R I C A L CONTACT 4.2
COUPLER. E L E C T R I C A L L Y P O I A K W E D RELAY 4.30
DIRECTIONAL 15.1 DC E L E C T R I C A L L Y RESTORED DROP 11.2.5 DS
R F ROTARY 15.7 ELECTROCHEMICAL S T E P - F U N C T I O N D E V I C E 7.5

83
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
ELECTROCHEMICAL T I M E - D E P E N D E N C E T n r W ELECTROCHEMICAL TIME-DEPENDENCE
CELL INTERNAL SHIELD CELL INTERNAL SHIELD
Class Class
Name Item No. Letter Name Item No. Letter
ELECTROCHEMICAL INE-OEPENOENCE CELL 7.5 FUNCTIONAL SIGNALS
ELECTRODE, AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT 19.2.1
CATHODE 1.1.1 COMPOSITE CIRCUIT 19.2.8
COLLECTING 7.1.1 DIGITAL LOGIC ELEMENTS 19.2.7
COLLECTING AND (HITTING 7.1. LINEAR ELEMENT 19.2.3
CONTROL ING 7.1.2 RELAY CONTACTS 19.2.4
DEFLECTING 7.1.2.2 RELAY OR OPERATING COIL 19.2.5
EMITTING 7.1.1 SIGNAL GENERATOR 19.2.2
KCl!UK 7.1.2. SWITCH 19.2.6
GR 10 7.1.2.1 FUSE 9.1 F
GNITO* 7.1.2.3 FUSIBLE ELEMENT 9. 1 F
ELECTROLYTIC CAPALlTOA
EL ECT ROLV IC CELL
2.2.2
9 . J .3
FUSIBLE LINK
FUTURE , EQUIPMENT
2.12.3
3.4 sa
w
ELECTROMAGNETIC RAO I AT ION DEPENDENCE 1.1 GALVANOMETER 12.1
ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION SENSITIVITY 1.3 GAP 9.3
9.3.4
ELECTROMAGNETICALLV-OPERATEO COUNTER
ELECTRON TUBE
12.2
7.1
HORN
PROTECTIVt 9.3.5
APPLICATIONS 7.3 SPHERE 9. 3.6
HEATER 7.1. GAS PRESSURE RELAY 9.5.12.19
NOTES 7.2 GAS-FILLED TUBE ENVELOPE 1.10.3
ELECTRON TUBE TERMINALS 5 . 1 . 2 GAS-FILLEU WAVEGUIDE 3.6.2.3
ELECTRONIC DIVIDER I T . 5 GAS. RECOGNITION SYMBOL 1.4. 1
ELECTRONIC FJNCTIUN GENERATOR 17.6 GASEOUS LIQUIO,RECOGNITION SYMBOL 1.4.4 ---
ELECTRONIC MULTIPLIER I T . 4 G A T E , CONTROL ELECTKOOE 8.2.9
ELEMENT
CIRCUIT 14.1.1
G E I G E R - M U E L L E R COUNTER TUBE
GENERALIZED AC SOURCE
7.5
2.7
FILM .3.7 GENERALIZED INTEGRATOR 17.7
FUSE * . l GENERATING STATION 21.1
FUSIBLE .1 GENERATOR
HALL . 9 ALTERNATING CURRENT 13.1.2.2 G
THERMAL 2.14 MR DIRECT CURRENT 13.1.2.1 G
EMITTER B . 2 . 4 HARD 13.1.5 G
EMITTING ELECTRODt 7.1.1 SYNCHRONOUS 13.1.2.3 G
COLO CATHODE 7.1.1.3 GENERATOR 13.1.2 G
DIRECTLY HEATED CATHODE 7.1.1.1 COMPOUND 13.4.12.16 G
INDIRECTLY HEATEU CATHODE 7.1.1.2 F I E L D 13.2 L
IUNICALLY HEATED CATHODE 7.1.1.6 MAGNETOEIECTRIC 13.5.10 G
PHOTOCATHODE 7.1.1.4 SYNCHRONOUS 13.6.1 G
POOL CATHODE 7.1.1.5 MINDING SYMBOLS 13.3
ENCLOSURE I.10 GENERATOR. ELECTRONIC FUNCTION 17.6
ENVELOPE 1.10 GLOW LAMP 11.1.3 DS
ENVELOPE CONNECTIONS 5.1.2 GOUBAU LINE 3.6.7 w
ENVELOPE TERMINALS 5.1.2.2 GOVERNOR 4.27 S
EPITAXIAL TRANS SUIR .06.01 0 GRID ELECTRODE 7.1.2.1
EPITAXIAL TRANSISTOR
OJAL WER
B.06.02
16.1.1.2 a GRID-TYPE
GROUNO
ANNUNCIATOR 11.2.2
3.9.1
EOUIVALENT CHASSIS CONNECTION 3.9.2 EO
GROUND DETECTOR 12.1
ERASING HEAD 2 . 9 . 4 PU GROUNO RELAYS 9.5.10
ISAKI DIODE >.5.7.1 CR GROUPING O F LEADS 3.1.10
EVACUATED SMI ICH 4.25.3 s GUIDED PATH 3. 1. I
EXCHANGE EQUIPMENT 20.3 GVRATOR 15.8.3 I
EXCITOR ELECTRODE 7.1.2.4 M-PLANE COUPLING 15.2.1 CP
EXPANSION AMPLIFIER 16.2.1 AR HALF-HAVE ANTENNA 2.3
EXPLOSIVE SOUI 2.12.1 SO HALF-HAVE RECTIFIER IDIOOEI .5.1 CR
EXTERNAL SHIELD, X-RAY 7.1.6.2 HALL ELEMENT 2.9
EXTRINSIC ADJUSTABILITY 1.1 HALL GENERATOR 8.9
FACSIMILE I TELEGRAPH) 20.5.6.6 HANU GENERATOR 13.1.5 G
FACSIMILE RECEIVER 20.5.7.6 HANOSET 10.3 HS
FACSIMILE SET 16.1.1.2 HEAD 2.9 PU
FAST OPERATE RELAY 4.30 ERASING 2.9.4 PU
FAST RELEASE RELAY 4.30 RECORDER 2.9.2 PU
FAULT SIGNAL CODE 19.1.3 REPRODUCER 2.9.3 PU
FEED-THROUGH CAPACITOR 2.2.12 c STERO 2.9.6 PU
FEEDBACK AMPLIFIER 16.2.8 AR HEADSET 10.04.02 HT
FEMALE NDNPOL AR I / E u CONNECTOR 5.4.4 J.P HEAOSET 10.04.03 HT
FEMALE POL AR I 7 ED CONNECTOR 5.4.5 J,P HEARING AID RECEIVER 10.4 MT
FERRITE BEAD RINGS 15.18 HEATER 7.1.5
FIELD POLARIZATION AMPLITUDE MODULATOR 15.8.2 A,U HEATING LAMP 20.4
FIELD POLARIZATION ROTATOR 15.8.1 A.U HEATING RESISTOR 2.1.8
FIELD MINDING 13.2 I HIGH-PASS FILTER 16.1.1.2 FL
FIELD-EFFECT TRANSISTOR 8.6.10.1 HOOK SWITCH 4.25.1 S
FIELD-EFFECT TRANSISTOR 8.6.11.1 0 HORN 10.1.3 LS
FIELD, GAP 9.3.4
COMMUTATING 13.2.1 HOWLER 10.1.3.2 LS
COMPENSATING 13.7.1 HYBRID 15.4 HY
PERMANENT MAGNET 13.2.4 CIRCULAR 15.4.4 HY
SEPARATELY EXCITEU 13.2.3 JUNC I ON 15.4.2 HY
SERIES 13.2.2 HYOKO-ELECTRIC GENERATING STATION 21.2
SHUNT 13.2.3 HYSTERESIS MOTOR 13.5.7
FELO, GENERATOR JR ROTO* 13.2 IGNITER ELECTRODE 7.1.2.3
FILAMENT, ELECTRON TUBE 7.1.5 IGNITER SOU I 2.12.2 SO
FILAMENTARY TRANSISTOR 8.06.08 ILLUMINATING LAMP 11.1.4 DS
FILAMENTARY TRANSISTOR 8.06.09 INCANOESCENT LAMP 11.1.4 OS
FILM ELEMENT, ARRESTER 9.3.7 INDICATING LAMP 11.2 OS
FILTER INDICATING METER 12. 1
FREUOtNCY 15.16.2 FL INDICATING. PILOT, SIGNALING, OR
MODE 15.16.1 Fl SWITCHBOARO LIGHT 11.2.7
FILTER 16.1.1.2 Fl INDIRECTLY HEA TED CA THUDE 7.1.1.2
BAND ELIMINATION 16.1.1.2 FL INDUCTION GENERA TUR 11.5.1 G
BAND PASS 16.1.1.2 Fl INDUCTION MOTOR 13.5.1
HIGH PASS 16.1.1.2 FL INDUCTION VOLTAGE REGULATOR 6.4.12-.14 VR
LOU PASS 16.1.1.2 FL INDUCTIVE REACTANCE 15.1.2.2
FIVE CONDUCTOR CABLE 3.1.8.6 W INUUCTIVE SU5CEPTANCE 15.1.2.3
FIXED CONDENSER 2.2. 1 C INOUCTIVE TERMINATION 6.2.7 AT
FIXEO CONTACT 4.2. 1 INDUCTOR 6.2
FIXED DIRECTION CIRCULATOR 15.4.5 HV SATURABLE-CORE 6. 3
FLANGES * WAVEGUIDE 5.7 J.P SHUNT 6.2.6
FLASHER 4.22 OS TAPPEO 6.2.3
FLEXIBLE WAVEGUlOfc 3.6.4 w
FLOH 1.7 INHERENT VARIABILITY 1.1.2
FLOW-ACTUATED SWITCH 4.17 s LINEAR 1.1.2.1
FLUORESCENT LAMP 11.1.2 DS NONLINEAR 1.1.2.2
TOOT OPERATED SWITCH 4.23 s INHERENT VARIABILITY, NON-LINEAR 1.1.2
FORWARD-WAVE TRAVELING-NAVE TUBE 15.I4.1-.5 V INSTRUMENT SHUNT 2.1.9
FOUR LAYER OIODE 8.5.8 CR INSTRUMENT, METER 12.1
FOUR-POSITION SWITCH 4.3.8.3 S INSULATED GATE 8.2.8
FOUR-WIRE TWO-WAY RtPEATER 16.4.4 AR INTEGRAL HEATER, THERMOCOUPLE 2.13.2
FRAME CONNECTION 3.9.2 INTEGRATING METER 12.1
FREUUENCY CONVERTER, INDUCTION 13.5.2 INTEGRATOR 17.3
EREUUENCY FILTER 15.16.2 I INTEGRATOR (AMPLIFIER! 17.3
FREOUENCY METER 12.1 INTEGRATOR, GENERALIZED 17.7
INTENTIONAL DIRECT CURRENT ISOLATION 3.5
FULL-WAVE RECTIFItRf BRIDGE 16.3.3 CR INTERLOCK, MECHANICAL 14.1
FUNCTION POTENTIOMETER 17.a R INTERLOCK, SAFETY 4.15
FUNCTIONAL FLOW PATH 19.1.1 INTERNAL SHIELO, TUBE 7.1.6.1

84
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
INTRINSIC REGION INTRINSIC REGION
Index
OVERHEAD LINE OVERHEAD LINE
Ciass Cfoss
Name Item No. Letter Name Item No. Letter
INTRINSIC REGION
INTRINSIC VARIABILITY
.2.1
1.1.2
MALE NONPOLARIZEO CONNECTUR
MANUAL SWITCHBOARD
5.4.3
20.3.3
J.r
MANUALLY RESTORED DROP 11.2.A OS
IDNICALLV HEATED CATHDDE 7.1.1.A
MARCONI ANTENNA 2.1
lONIIATIDN CHAMBER 7.5
MARGINAL RELAY A. 30
IONIZING ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION
MASTER SWITCH A.11.4 s
DEPENDENCE 1.1.2
MATEO WAVEGUIDE FLANGES 5.7. 1 J.P
IONIZING PARTICULATE RADIATION DEPENDENCE 1.1.)
MATING CONNECTORS 5.1.A J.P
IONIZING RADIATION 1.03.02
MEASURING TRANSDUCER 2.11 NT
IONIZING RADIATION 1.03.03
ISOLATOR 2.A.A AT MECHANICAL
AT CONNECTION IA.1
ISOLATOR 15..I
INTERLOCK 14. t
ISOLATOR, PHOTON-COUPLED B.10
j LINKAGE 1A.1
JACK 5.3.1
MERCURY POOL TUBE 7.1.7 Y
CONTACT A.2.1.1
MESA TRANSISTOR B.A.I a
MESSAGE REGISTER 12.2
JEWELED SIGNAL LIGHT METALLIC RECTIFIER B.5.1 CR
u.2.a os METER 12.1
JOINT, ROTARY IS.7
JUNCTION OF PATHS METERING DEVICE. OUTDOOR 6.4.21
3.1.6 MICROANMETER 12.1
JUNCTION TRANSISTOR . 6.1
JUNCTION, HYBRID MICROPHONE 10.2 NK
15.A.2 MICROPHONE-LOUDSPEAKER 10.1.1.1 LS
KEY CONTACT

A.2.1.1 MILL1 AMMETER 12.1
KEY OPERATED LOCK SWITCH A.25.5
KEY SWITCH MINOR FUNCTIONAL FLOW PATH 19.1.1.2
A. 12 MOBILE RADIO STATION 20.1.1
KEY, TELEGRAPH A.26
KEYBOARD I ELt GRAPH) MODE FILTER IS.16.1
20.5.6.5 MODE SUPPRESSION 15.6
KEYBOARD PERFORATOR 20.5.7.7
KINESCOPE NODE TRANSDUCER 15.5 NT
7. 3 . 6 MOOULATOR, FIELD POLARIZATION, AMPLITUOE A
KLYSTRON 11.a.6
15.12 MOIST GAS RECOGNITION SYMBOL 1.A.5
KNIFE SWITCH A.6.3
LAMP MOMENTARY CONTACT A.2.1.1
II.I MOMENTARY SNITCH A.7 I
BALL AST 11.1.1 RT
COLO-CATHODE MONITORING AMPLIFIER 16.2.1 AR
11.1.3 OS
COMMUNICATION SWITCHBOARD NOTION, MECHANICAL 14.1
11.2.6 OS MOTOR
FLUORESCENT 11.1.2 OS ALTERNATING CURRENT
GLOW 11.1.3 OS
11.1.1.2 I
COMPOUND 13.05
INCANDESCENT 11.1.A OS
COMPOUND 13.06
INDICATING 11.2.7 OS CONVERTER
NEON 11.1.3 OS 13.7.5 NG
DIRECT CURRENT 13.1.3.1
SWITCHBOARD 11.2.7 OS FIELD
LATCHING RELAY A.30 13.2 L
MULTISPEED 13.1.A
LEADSCREW SWITCH A.IA.3 RELUCTANCE
LETTER COMBINATIONS. TERMINAL 5.1.2 13.5.a
SERIES AC 13.5.3
LIGHT DEPENDENT DEVICE 1.3 SYNCHRONOUS
LIGHT, 13.1.3.3 8
SYNCHRONOUS 13.6.1
INDICATING 11.2.7 OS
WINDING SYMBOLS 13.3
JEWELED SIGNAL 11.2. DS MOVABLE SHURT 3..3 AT
SIGNAL 11.2.7 OS
ROVING CONTACT 4.2.2
SWITCHBOARD 11.2.7 DS
NULITIPLIER* ELECTRONIC 17.4
LIGHTNING ARRESTER 9.3
LIMIT SWITCH A.1A s MUL 1 CELL 2.5.3 BT
MUL 1 GAP ARRESTER 9.3.
LIMIT SWITCH, SPRING RETURN 4.14.5 s MULTIPOSITION SWITCH
LI MI TER, CURRENT 9.2 F 4.13 s
MULTISPEED MOTOR 11. 1.4
LIMITING AMPLIFIER 16.2.1 AR
LINE MUL I STUB TUNER 15.1.6
MUL 1 WAY SWITCH 4.3.a s
DISTRIBUTION 3.2 MULIIWINDING COIL
3.2.45 4.5.2
LOADED
OVERHEAD 3.2.34 MUSHROOM HE AO SWITCH 4.25.4 s
RADIO 3.2.6 N-EHITTER, PLURALITY B.2.4.2.1
SINGLE 8.2.4.2
SUBMARINE 3.2.3
TELEPHONE 3.2.1.1 N/P REGION a.2.2.2
NEGATIVE PHASE SEUUENCE OVbRCURREN RELAY 9 . 5 . 1 2 . 1 B
TELEPHONE LINE 3.2.1.1 NEON LAMP
TRANSMISSION 3.2 11.1.3 DS
NETWORK 16.5
UNDERGROUND 3.2.2
UNDERWATER 3.2.4 LOW VOLTAGE POWER 16.5.2
PHASE CHANGING 16.6
LINE STRETCHER 5.6.6
PROTECTOR 9.4.3 CB
LINEAR ADJUSTABILITY 1.1.1.3
NO BIAS RELAY 4 . 30
LINEAR COUPLER 6.5
NOISE METER 12.1
LINEAR VARIABILITY 1.1.2.1
LINK, SENSING 2.12.3 NUN-AECIPROCAL
DEVICES 15.8
LINKAGE, MECHANICAL 14.1
LIOUID LEVtL SWITCH 4 . IB DIRECTIONAL PHASE SHIFTER 15.a.
L1UU10, RECOGNITION SYMBOL 1.4.2 MUNI ONI ZINC ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION
LOAD-RATIU CONTROL TRANSFORMER 6.4.11
DEPENDENCE 1.3. 1 _
LOADED LINE 3.2.5 NONIONIZING RADIATION DEPENDENCE 1.3.3
LOCAL BATTfcRY TELIPHONE SET 20.6.2 NUNL1 NE AR
AUJUSTABIL1TY 1.1.1.
LOCKING SWITCH 4.10
LOOP ANTENNA 2.3.3
RESISTOR 2.1.5 R
VARIABILITY 1.01.01.02
LOOP COUPLING, ELECTRON TUBE 7.1.7.1
VARIABILITY 1. 0 1 . 02
LOOP. COUPLING 15.02.02 CP VARIABILITY 1.01.02.02
LOOP, COUPLING 15.03 CP
LOUDSPEAKER 10.1.3 LS NONLOCKING SWITCH 4.9 S
NONPOLARIZED CONNECTORS 5.04.03 J,P
LOUDSPEAKER-MICROPHONE 10.1.3.3 LS
NONPOLARIZED CONNECTORS 5.04.04 J.P
LOUOSPEAKER-TYPE TELEPHONE SET 20.6.9
LOW PASS FILTER 16.1.1.2 Fl NUNREAC IVE RELAY 4. 30
LOW-VOLTAGE POWER NETWORK 16.5.2 NONSHOR 1NG SELECTOR SWITCH 4.13.2 S
MACHINE, ROTATING 13.1 NORHALLEO THROUGH 5.3.6 J.P
MACHINES, NPIN W/OHMIC CONNtl.ilON B. 6. 5 0
AC AND DC COMPOSITE 11.7 MG
NPIP W/OHMIC CONNECTION .6. 7 0
ALTERNATING CURRtNT 13.04.09 NPN t r a n s s t o r B.6.2 a
NPN TRANSVERSE BIASED 8.6. J 0
ALTERNATING CURRENT 13.04.10 NPNP SWITCH, TRIODE
13.4 .6.13.1
DIRECT CURRENT B.G NUMEROUS CONDUCTORS 3.1.2.3 w
MAGIC 15.4.2 HV OHMIC OROP EXCITER 13.5.14.15
MAGNET, PERMANENT 2.a OHMMETER 12. 1
MAGNETIC
AMPLIFIER 16.2 OIL PRESSURE MEIER 12. 1
ONE-TIRE THERMAL-OVERLOAD DEVICE 9. 1 F
BLOWOUT COIL 4.4 L
CORE 6.1.2 ONE-WAY REPEATER 16.4.1
ONE-WAY SIMPLEX TELEGRAPH REPEATER 20.4. 1
CORE TRANSFORMER 6.4.2
FIELD DEPENDENT DEVICE 1.2.2 OPEN CIRCUIT 3.B.I AT
HEAD 2.9 PU OPERATING COIL 4.5
JPERATING OUANTITY IRELAYSI 9 . 5. 9
MEMORY CORE 6.1.4
SHIELDED WINOINGS 6.4.2.3 OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER 17.1 AR
4.30 OPtHA TORS SET 10.1 HS
MAGNETIC-LATCHING RELAY
4.30 OPTICAL SHIELDING 1.11.2
MAGNETICALLY POLARIZED RELAY
OSCILLATOR 2.07 Y
NAGNETOELECTRIC GENERATOR 13.5.10
OSCILLOGRAPH 12.1
MAGNE T0RES1STOR 2.1.7
SC1LL0SC0PE 12.1
MAGNETRON 15.11
MAJOR FUNCTIONAL FLOW PATH 19.1.1.1 OUT-OF-STEP RELAY 9.5.12.20
MAKE CONTACT 4.3.2 OUTDOOR METERING DEVICE 6.4.21
OUTPUT AMPLIFIER 16.2.1 AR
MAKE SWITCH 4.07.01
OUTPUT CONTROL, VARIABLE 2.4.4 AT
MAKE SWITCH 4.09.01
OVERCURRENT RELAY 9 . 5 . 12. 1
MAKE SWITCH 4.10.01
4.3.4 OVERT REOUENCY RELAY 9.5.12.10
RAKE-BEFOR-BREAK CONTACT
OVERHEAD LINE 1.2.4 W
MAKE-BEFORE-BREAK SWITCH A.10.5

85
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
OVERTEMPERATURE RELAY OVERTEMPERATURE RELAY
SAFETY INTERLOCK
Index SAFETY INTERLOCK
Class Class
Name Item No. Letter Name Item No. Letter
O V E R T E M P E R A T U R E REL AY 9.5.1?.11 PRINTED MIRING BOARD CHASSIS CONNECTION 3.9.2
P-EH1TIER, PRINTING REPERFORATOR 20.5.7.3
PLURALIrr I!.?...1.1 PROftE COUPLING 15.2.5 CP
SINGLE .2.4.1 PROGRAM AMPLIFIER 16.2.1 AR
P/N REGION 8.2.2.1 PROPORTIONAL COUNIER TUBE 7.5 V
PAO 2.04 PROTECTIVE FUNCIIJNS, RELAY 9.5.1
PAGE P O I N T I N G I T E L E G R A P M I 20.5.6.4 PROTECTIVE GAP 9.3.5
P A G E - P R I NT ING R E C E I V E * 20.5.7.4 PROTECTOR. NETWORK 9.4.3 CB
PAIR 3.1.7.1 PUSH BUTTON 4.07 s
PARAMETRIC AMPLIFIER 16.2 AR PUSH BUTTON 4.08 S
P A R A M E T R I C 01 ODE .5.2 CR PUSH-BUTTON TELEPHONE SET 20.6.5 A
P A R T I C U L A T E R A D I A T I O N DEPENDENCE 1.3.3.2 kUAU CONDUCTORS 3.1.7.3
P A S S I V E RELAY S T A T I O N 20.1.7 QUARTZ CRYSTAL UNIT 2 . 10 Y
PASSIVE SPACE-STATION 20.2.3 RADIATION UEPENDENCE 1.3
PATH 3. I 4ADIATI0N-SENSITIVITV INOICATOR 1.3
A I R OR SPACE 3. 1.3 RADIO BEACON 20.1.5
C0N0UCT1VE 3.1.2 RAUIO FREQUENCY CABLE, COAXIAL 3.1.9
C R O S S I N G OF P A T H S 3.l.B.6 (HMO LINK 3.2.6 W
DIELECTRIC 3.1.B.4 RAulO S A 1 ON 20.1
J U N C T I O N OF P A T H S 3. l . B . 2 REACTANCE UIOOE 8.5.2 CR
TRANSMISSION 3. 1 REACTANCE.CAPACITIVE 15.1.2.1 2
PE1T0DE 7.3.2 1NUUCTIVt 15.1.2.2
PERFORATED TAPE 20.S.6.2 INFINITE 15.1.2.3
PERMANENT MAGNET 2.8 ZERO 15.1.2.4 2
PERMANENT MAGNET F I E L D 13.2.4 RE ACT 1VE FACTOR MtTER 12.1
PHASE BALANCE R E L A Y 9.5.12.12 REACTOR 6.2 L
PHASE C H A N G I N G NETWORK 16.6 R t AO 1 NG HEAD 2.9.3 PU
PHASE SEUUENCE Q U A N T I T I E S 1.5.11 RECEIVER, HEADSET 10.04
PHASE SEUUENCE R E L A Y S 9.5.12.13 RECEIVtR.
PHASE S H I F T E R HEARING AID 10.4
MATCHED 15.17 SYNCHRO 13.8
non-reciprocal 15.B.2 TELEPHONE 10.4
phase s h i f t e r 16.6 RECEIVER. TELEGRAPH 20.5.3
capacitor 2.2.7 RECEPTACLE 5.3.3 J,
differential 16.6.4 RECORDER SET. SOUND 16.1.1.2
machines 13.5.17.18 RECURDING DEMAND METER 12.1
phase s h i f t i n g n e t w o r k 16.6. 1 RfCURDING MEAD 2.9.2 PU
phasemeter 12.1 RECORDING METER 12. I
photocathoue 7.1.1.4 RECORDING 2.09.02 PU
photocell. barrier B.7.3 BT RECORDING UNI 16.01.01.02
photoconductive tkansducer RECTANGULAR HAVE GU1 DE 3.6.2
8.7.1 CR
photooiuue 8.5.4.1 CR RECTIFIER 8.5.1.16.3 CR
phoioehissive dioue c phototrans istor 8.10.4 0 ELECTROLYTIC 8.5.1 CR
photon-coupleu isolator B.10 U ELECTRON TUBE 7.03.04.01 V
photosensitive cell 8.7 V ELECTRON TUBE 7.03.07
phuto t r a n s s t o h 8.05.10 ELECTRON TUBE 7.03.07.05
phototransistor 8.06.16 MARKING (POLARITY! 16.3.4
phototube 7.3.5 METALLIC 8.5.1 CR
photovoltaic transducer B.7.3 SEMICONDUCTOR 8.5.1 CR
p h y s i c a l s t a t e r e c o g n i t i o n symbol 1.4 <ECTIFVING JUNCTIUN 8.2.2
PICKUP 2.9 PU REED. VIBRATOR 4.2.2.5 MP
P I C T U R E TUBE 7.3.6 V REGENtRATIVE-TYPE (TELEGRAPH REPEATER 1 20.4.5.4
P I E Z O E L E C T R I C C R Y S T A L UNIT 2.10 Y REGISTER, MESSAGE 12.2
PILOT LIGHT 11.2.7 OS -(EGULATING GENERATOR 11.4.20 G
P I L O T Ml RE R E L A Y 9.5. 7 REGULATING MACH INL 13.5.16 G
P I L O T M I R E , D I F F E R E N T I A L CURRENT I RELAY I 9.5.12.14 REGULATOR
P I L U T M I R E , D I R E C T I O N A L COMPARISU SPEED 4.27 S
(RELAY) 9.5.12.15 STEP VOLTAGE 6.4.10
P L A I N A V E SU I OF F L A N G E S 5.7.2 VOLTAGE 6.4.10.14
PLANAR T R A N S I S T O R 8.06.01 Q REGULATOR DIODE 8.5.11 CR
PLANAR T R A M M STOR 8.06.02 Q RELAY 4.30
P L A Y B A C K HEAD 2.9.3 PU UUL 4.05
PLUG 5.3 CUIL 4.30.01
COAX I A L 5.6 CONTACT 4.2.1.1
CONNECTOR 5.3 UtMANJ TOTALIZING METER 12.1
FEMALE 5.3.1 FUNCTIONS 9.5. 1
MALE 5.3.2 UPERATING QUANT 11 I S 9.5.9
SMITCHBOARD 5.3.5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIUNS 9.5.1
P N E U M A T I C , R E C O G N I T I O N SYMBOL 1.4.1 SHUNT 2.1.9 R
P N I N M/OHMIC C O N N E C T I O N B.6.6 Q THERMAL 4.30.5
P N I P M/OHHIC C O N N E C T I O N 8.6.4 Q RELUCTANCE MOTOR 1 3.5.8
PNP T R A < ( S I S T 3 R 8.6.1 Q RtMANEN RELAY 4.30
W/CASE CONNECTED 8.6.1.1 Q REPEATER 16.4 AR
PNPN S W I T C H , REPEATING COIL 1 SEE TRANSFORMER)
DIODE 8.5.8 CR REPRODUCER 2.9 PU
TRIOOE 8.6.12.1 Q REPRODUCER, SOUNU 2.9.3 PU
P O I N T CONTACT T R A N S I S T O R 8.06.01 Q REPRODUCING UNIT 16.1.1.2 A
P O I N T CONTACT TRANSISTOR 8.06.02 REPULSION MOTOR 13.5.1
P O L A R I T Y SYMBOL 1.6 REPULSION-START MUTOR 13.5.6
POLARIZED CAPACITOR 2.2.2 C
P O L A R I Z E D CONNECTORS 5.4.5.7 J.P RESISTANCE LAMP 11.1.1 RT
P O L A R I Z I N G MARKS 1.06.03.01 RESISTANCE. ELEMENT 15.1.1.5
P O L A R I Z I N G MARKS 1.06.03.02 VOLTAGE SENSITIVE 2.1.6 RV
P O L Y P H A S E TRANSFORMER 6.4.16 RESISTIVE TERMINAIION 2.2.11 AT
POOL CATHODE 7.1.1.5 RESISTOR 2.1 R
POOL C A T H O D E R E C T I F I E R 7.3.7.5 HEATING 2.1.8 HR
PORTABLE R A O I O S T A T I O N 20.1.2 NDNL1 NE AR 2.1.5 R
POSITION INDICATOR 12. 1 SHUNT 2.1.10 R
POSITIONAL SERVOMECHANISM 17.8 TAPPED 2.1.2 R
P O S I T I V E PHASE SEQUENCE U N D E R V O L T A G E THERMAL 2.1.12
RELAY 9.5.12.17 RESOLVER 13.8
RE SONATDR 15.09
PUT 2.01.04 RESONATOR 15.10 V
P O T E N T I A L TRANSFORMER 6.4.20 RESONATOR. TUNING FORK 20.6 Y
P O L A R I T Y MARKINGS 1.6.3.2 RETURN CIRCUIT 3.9
POTENTIOMETER 2.1.3 REVERSIBLE 0IRECT1ON CIRCULATOR 15.4.5.1 HY
PO I OME T E R CON A C T , ADJUSTABLE 4.2.2.1 RF AMPLIFIER 16.2.1 AR
POTENTIOMETER, FUNCTION 17.8 RF COUPLER. RUT AR Y 15.7 t
RHEOSTAT 2.01.03 R
POME R RHtUSTAT 2.01.04 R
AMPLIF I ER 16.2.
RIDGED WAVEGUIDE 3.6.6 W
CUNNEC TOR 5.4
RINGER. TELEPHONE 10.1.1 OS
D I R E C T I O N A L RELAY 9.5.
12.1
RINGING RELAY 4.30
F A C T O R METER
ROTARY
F LOU 1.7
16.3 PS AMPLIF 1 ER 13.4.20.23 G
RECTIFIER 15.7
1 6 . 1 . 1.2 PS JUINI
SUPPLY
PHASE CONVERTER 13.5.1
SUPPLY C O N N E C T O R S 5.4
SWITCH 4.14.4 S
S U P P L Y . OC 2 . 5 .. 1
PRE AMP 16.2. 1 ROTATING
AMPLIFIER 13.4.22 G
P R E A M P L I F I E R STAGfc 16.2.1
ARMATURE 13.1.5
PRESET A D J U S T A B I L I T Y 1.1.1.2
E L E C T R I C A L CONTACT RING ( S U P R I N G ) 4.2.2.7 SR
CONTINUOUS 1.1.4.1
1. 1 . 4 . 2 R O T A T I N G MACHINE 13-1 <
IN STEPS
ROTATION 14.2
PRESSURE O P E R A T E D SMI I C H 4.19 s ROTATOR, FIELD P0LARI7ATI0N 15.8.1 A
PRIMARY D E T E C T O R 2.11 MT
PRIME MOVERS ( G E N E R A T I N G S T A T I U N S I 21.4 S A F E T Y GAP 9.3
SAFETY INTERLOCK 4.15 S

86
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
S A N D W I C H LINE
Index SANDWICH LINE
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
Class Class
Name Item No. Letter Name Hem No. Letter
CIRCUIT CLOSING 4.15.2 s SOUIRREL-CAGE MACHINE 13.5.1 B.G
CIRCUIT OPENING 4.15.1 s STAbiSTOR 8.5.1 VR
SANWICH LINE 3.7.2 u STANDARD VOLUME INDICATOR 12.1
SANUMILH MOUND RELAY A.30 STAR CONNECTION 1.9.7
SATURABLE-CORE INDUCTOR 6.3 L
STATION, TtlEPHONE 16.1.1.2 A
SATURATED REACTOR 6.3 L
STEAM, RECOGNITION SYMBOL 1.4.5
SCOTT CONNECTION 1.9.10
SECTOR SHITCH 6.6.7 -
S
STEP-VOL TAGE REGULATOR
STEREO HEAD
6.4.10
2.9.6

PU
SEGMENTAL CONTACT SWITCH 4.13.* s STORAGE OIOOE 8.5.5 CR
SELECTOR SWITCH 4.13 s STRETCHER, LINE 5.6.6
SELF-INTERRUPTING SWITCH 4.22 s STRIP LINE 3.7
SEMICONDUCTOR APPLICATIONS 8.5 STRIP-TYPE TRANSMISSION PATH 3.7
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE B.01 STRIP. BIMETALLIC 2.14 HR
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE B.07
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE B.OI - STRIPLINE
BALANCED 3.7.2
ELEMENT SYMBOLS B.2 UNBALANCED 3.7.1
MULES .4
5.1.2 STRUCTURE, SLOW-WAVE 2.6.3 DL
TERMINALS 1 SUBMARINE LINE 3.2.3
THERMDCOOPLE a.s TC SUBSTATION 21.5
SEMICONDUCTOR DIOOE .5.1 CR SU8SYNCHR0N0US MOTOR 13.5.9
SEMICONDUCTOR REGION, ONE CONNECTION .2.1 SUMMING AMPLIFIER 17.2 AR
TWO OR MORE .2.1.1
SEMICONDUCTOR TRI DDE .6.12.1 -
a
SUPPLY. POWER
SUPPRESSION, NODE
16.1.1.2
15.6
PS
2
SENSING LINK 2.12.3 so SURFACE BARRIER TRANSISTOR 8.06.01 Q
SENSOR 2.11 NT SURFACE BARRIER TRANSISTOR 8.06.02 Q
SEPARATE DRIVE VIBRATOR 4.21.2 G SURGE ARRESTER 9.3
SEPARATELY EXCITED FIELO 13.2.3 L
SUSCEPTANCE, CAPALITIVE 15.1.2.1
SERIES ELEMENT 15.1.1 I INDUCTIVE 15.1.2.1
SERIES FIELD 13.2.2 L
INFINITE 15.1.2.4
SERVME CHAN I SM t PUSH I ON AL IT.I A 1ER0 15.1.2.5
SET, FACSIMILE 16.1.1.2 A,U SM ITCH 4.6 S
SET, OPtRAIORS 10.3 HS SWITCH
SHADEO-POLE MOTOR 13.5.5 I CENTRIFUGAL 4.24 S
SHAFT OPERATED SWITCH 4.2 s COMBINATION LOCKING ANO NONLOCKING 4 . 11 S
SHIELO CONTACTOR 4.29 S
ELECTRICAL 1.11.1 i FlOW-ACTUAIED 4.17 S
ELECTRON TUBE 7.1.6 f FOOT-OPERATED 4.21 S
OPTICAL 1.11.2 GENERAL 4.6 S
SHIELD, SHIELDING 1.11 GOVERNOR 4.27 S
ELECTRON TUBE 7.1.6 HOOK 4.25.1 S
SHIELDED KEV 4.12 i
F I V E CONDUCTOR CABLE 3.1.8.2
w LIMIT 4.1 s
S I N G L t CONUUCTOR 3.1.8.1
TRANSFORMER 6.4.2.2 w LigUIO-LEVEL-ACTUATEO 4.18 s

IWU CUNDUCTOK CAUL F 3. 1 . 8 . 4


LOCKING 4.10 s

SHIELDING, OPTICAL 1.11.2


w MULTIWAY 4.3.8 s

SHIFTER, PHASE 13.05.17.18 NONLOCKING 4.9 s

SHIFTER, PHASE 16.06


2 PRESSURE-ACTUATED 4 . 19 s

SHUCKLEV UIODE 8.5.8 PUSHBUTTON 4.7 s

SHORT CIRCUIT 3.8.2


CR RFLAY 4.30
SHORT ING S E l t C T O R SwITCH 4.13.1
AT SAFETY INTERLOCK 4. 15 s

SHUNT
S SELECTOR 4.13 s

CAPACITOR 2.2.9 c
TELEGRAPH KEY 4.26 s

URIVE VIBRATOR 4.28.1


TELEPHONE 4.25.2 s
ELEMENT 15.1.2 G IENPERATURE-ACTUATED 4.20 s
F ItLD 13.2.1
I THERMAL CUTOOT 4.22
os
I(DUCTOR 6.2.6
L THERMOSTAT 4.21 s
INSTRUMENT RELAY 7.1.9
L 1ME-UELAY 4.16
ss
RES1STOR 2.1.10
R TWO-CIRCUIT 4. 18

S I G N A L CODE 19.1.2
R VIBRATOR 4.28 G
SIGNAL FLOW 1.7 SWITCH CONTACT 4.2.1.2 s
SlI.NAL LIGHT 11.2. I
SWITCH WITH HORN GAP 4.6.6 s
SIGNALING UEVICF, OS SWITCH, BREAKER 9.4 CB
AUDI RLE 10. 1
CENTRIFUGAL 4.27 s

VISUAL 11.2
DS.LS HOOK 4.25.1 s

SIMULTANEOUS PRINTING (TELEGRAPH) 20.5.6.3


OS SWITCHBOARD JACK 5.3.5.1 J
SINGLE HEADSET 10.4.3
SWITCHBOARD LAMP 11.02
os
SINGLE PHASE TPANiFORMtR 6.4.15
HI SWITCHBOARD LAMP 11 .02.07 DS
SINGL -CUKRL I ( T t L E G R A P I REPEATER) 20.4.4.7
SWITCHBOARD, MANUAL 20.3.1

SlNGLE-THRuW SWITCH 4.6.1


SWITCHING FUNCTION 4. 1

SIREN 10.1.3 s SNITCHING, AUTOMATIC 20.3.2

SIX-PHASE SYMBOLS 1.9.11.14


LS SYNCHRONOUS
SLEEVE 4.2.1.4
CONDENSER 13.6.1.4

S L I u E SCREW T U N E R 15.1.4
CONVERTER 13.7.1.4 MG
SLIDE SWITLH
1 FREQUENCY CHANGER 13.6.5.6 MG
4.13.8 s
SLIDING CONTACT 4.2.2.1
GENERATOR 11.6.1.6 G
SR MOTOR 11.05.02
SLIP RING 4.2.2.7
MOTOR 13.06.01
S L O W O P t R A T b L A S E t. L A Y 4. 10
SYMMETRICAL VARISTOR 2.1.6 RV
SLUW UPE R A R E L A Y 4 . 10
SLOW R E L E A S E R E L A Y 4 . 10
SYMMETRICAL WAVEGUIDE CONNECTORS 5.7.1
SYNCHRO 11.8
SLOW-WAVE STUCIURt 2.6. )
SULArt C E L L . 7. 1 DL SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR 11.1.2.3 G
S O L E N O I D , U P E R I C 4.5 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR 13.1.1.3
SULID D I E L t C I R i : hAVEGUIDE 1.6.2.7
SYNCHRUSCOPE 12. 1
SOLIU-STATE THVRAIRUN 8.12
W
0
I OR V ADAPTER 5.6.5 CP
S O L I O , R E L O G N I I ()"* S Y f r i O L 1.4. 1
TAPE PRINTING 20.5.6.1
SOL I O N 7.4
TAPE-PRINTING RECEIVER 20.5.7.1

SUUNU P R U J E L T R , UNL'ERWATFR 10.1.1


TAPER, COAXIAL. WAVEGUIDE 3.6 w
SOUND RECORDER HEAD 2.9.2
LS TAPPED
StIUNO R E P R O D U C E R MEAD 2.9. 1
PU DELAY FUNCTIUN 2.6.2 DL
SOU.ND-POWEHEO TFLtPMONL S E T 0.6.11
PU HEATER 7.2.3

S O U N D E R , I L GR IG.1.4
A 1NDUCTOR 6.2. 3 L
S O U R C E , G E N E R A L I Z E U AC 2.7
DS RESIS TOR 2.1.2 R
SPACE P A T H 1 . 1. 1
TRANSFORMER 6.4.7 r
SPACE-STATION 20.2
TELEGRAPH EQUIPMENT 20.5

SPARK GAP 2.15


TELEGRAPH KEY 4.26 S
SPARK G A P 9. 1
TELEGRAPH REPEATER 20.4

SPLAKER ELECTROMAGNETIC 10.1.3.2


TELEGRAPH SUUNOER 10.1.4 DS
MAGNETIC 10.1.1.2
LS IELEMFTER 12.1
PERMANtNT MAGNET 10.1.3.2
LS TELEPHONE SET 20.6 A
SPECIAL FEATURES (ADJUSTABILITY) 1.01.0]
LS TELEPHONE.
S P E C I A L F E A T U R E S I A O J U S T A B I L 1 Y I 1.01.04
BELL 10.1.1 DS
S P E C I A L P R O P E R Y U E V I C E SYMBOLS 8. 3
BLOCK PROTECTOR 9.3.2
SPECIAL PROPERTY INDICATORS 1.2
DIAL 16.1.1.2 S
SPEED OPERATED SWITCH 4.24
OIAL SWITCH 4.25.2 S
SPEED REGULATOR 4.27
S LINE EQUALIZER 16.1.1.2 EQ
SPHERE GAP 9.3.6 RECEIVER 10.04 MT
SPLICE 3.1.6.4
RINGER 10.01.01 OS
S P L I T E N V E L O P E TUBE 1.10.2
SPLIT-PHASE * OR G E N E R A T O R 13.5.1
SET 10.3 MS
SPLIT-REED VI BRATUR 4.2.2.6
B,G STATION 16.1.1.2 A
SPLIT-STATOR CAPACITOR
MP TRANSMITTER ISEE MICROPHONE)
2.2.8
S P R I N G RETURN S W I I C H 4.7
C TELEPRINTER 16.1.1.2 A
s
SOUIB 2 . 12
TELETYPEWRITER 16.1.1.2 A
so
EXPLOSIVE 2.12.1
TEMPERATURE
so
IGNITER 2.12.2
DEPENDENT DEVICE 1.2.1
sa UEPENOENT DIODE 8.5.3 CR

87
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
TEMPERATURE SENSING ELEMENT TEMPERATURE SENSING ELEMENT
Index ZIG-ZAG
ZIG-ZAG
Class Class
Name Item No. Letter Name Item No. Letter
MEASURING THERMOCOUPLE 2.13.01 TC TWISTED WAVL-, 3.6.5
MEASURING THERMOCOUPLE 8.0.01 TC rVI' CONDUCTOR CABLE 3.1.8.5
MEIER 12. 1 IWU CONDUCTORS 3.1.2.1
UPERATEO SWITCH A.20 s IUI HAY Sl ICH 4.07.01
IWPERA TURE SENSING ELEMENT 2.1.12 RT TWO WAY S K I T C H 4.08
TEMPERATURE-ACTUATEO SWITCH A.20 s ) WAY SWIICH 4.09.03
SELECTOR SWITCH A. 1 3 . 6 s IMI-PHASE SYMBOLS 1.09.01
TERMINAL 5.1.1 TMI-PHASE SYMBOLS 1.09.02.01
TERMINAL BOARD S.l.l.l TB TWU-PHAsE SVNRnLS 13.03.02
TERMINAL DISCONTINUITY IS.1.1. 1 IWil-PULE JUHLE-TliBiJH SWIICH 4.6.2.I
I RM1 NAL GROUP ORIENTATION 5.1.2.3 TwO-PULE FIELD-nljCHAH.E SWITCH 4.6.5
REVEO 5.1.2.3 TwU-PUSITION SWITCH 4.3.8.1
REFERENCE POINT 5.1.2.6 TW-PUSIIIUN TKANsfER SalTCH 4.10.3
TERMINAL. CIRCUIT 5.1.1 IWD-WAV REPEATER 16.4.2
TERMINALS (ELECTRON TUBES, SEMICONDUCTOR TW.I-WAY RtPEATCR, BYPASSED 16.4.3
OEVICES. ETC.) 5.1.2 IWO-WAT S I P P L E I 20,. 5 . 4
BASE PIN 5.1.2.1 IWil-WAV SIMPLEX TEIE^RAPII REPEATtR 20. . 2
ENVELOPE 5.1.2.2 UNBALANCED ATTENUATOR 2.04.0}
TERMINATING ELEMENT 3.8 AT JNHAL ANCE U ATItNUATJR 2.04.06
TERMINA!ION 3. AT UNBALANCED STRIPLINE 3 . 1
TERMINATION UNDERCURRENT RELAY 9.5. 3
CAPACITIVE 2.2.10 AT HJERGRUNO CARL 1.2
INOUCTIVE 6.2.7 AT JNUERGROUNU CABLE 3.2.2
RESISTIVE 2.1.11 AT UNDERGROUND LINE 1.2.2
TEST BLOCK 5.5 TB UNDERGROUND TRANSMISSION PATH 1.2
TEST POINT 1.5 U'.UEHVDLTAGE KFLAY 9.5.12.4
THERMAL, JNUERWATER LINE 1.2.1
CONVERTER 12.1
CUTOUT
UNDERWATER SOUND PROJECTOR io. . LS
6.22 UNIDIRECTIONAL AIIENUAIOR 2.4.4 AT
ELEMENT 2 . 14 HR UN IUIREC IONAL NEGAI I VE-Rt SI STANCE
RCLAV 4.30.5 BREAKDOWN OIOUE 8.5.6.3 CR
RESISIOR 2.1.12 RT JNIJUNCIION, TYPE 8.6.8 O
THERMISTOR 2.1.12 RT 8.6.9
THERMO-ELECTRIC GENERATING STATION 21.3
TYPE y a
UNIT,
THERMOCOUPLE 2.13 TC PIEZOELECTRIC CRYSTAL 2.10
THERMOCOUPLE, INSULATED HEATER 2.13.2.2 TC RECORDING 16.I.1.2
THERMOCOUPLE, INTERNALLY CONNECTED HEATER 2.13.2.1 TC REPRODUCING 16.1.1.2
THERMOPILE 2.13.3 TC VACUUM T U R E 7.1
THERMOSTAT 4.21 s VACUUM-OPERATED SWITCH 4.19
THREE CONDUCTORS 3.1.2.2 VALVE CLEMENT, ARRESTER 9.3.7
THREE POSITION TRANSFER SWITCH 4.10.4 s V A 1 A C TUR B.5.2
THREE-PHASE SYMBOLS 1.4.3.10 - VARHOUR METER 12.1
THREE-POLE KNIFE SWITCH 4.6.4 s VAMARILITY 1.1
THREE-POSITION SWITCH 4.3.8.2 s GENERAL 1.1.1.1
THREE-WIRE PHASE SHIFTER 16.6.2 1.1.2
INHERE I
THYRATRON 1.3. INTRINSIC 1.1.2
THYRATRON, SOLIO-STATE .12 Q LI NE AR 1.01.01.03
IHYRISIUR
LINEAR 1.01.02.01
DIODE TYPE .OS.OB CR NONLINEAR 1.01.01.04
DIODE TYPt . 0 5 . 0 CR NONL I NE AR 1.01.02.02
IHVRISTOR.
SPECIAL FEATURES 1.01.03
- GATE .6.12 Q SPECIAL FEATURES 1.01.04
P-TYPE GATE 1.6.11 VARIABLE,
SEMICONDUCTOR SWITCH . 4 . 14 Q ATTENUATOR 2.44 AT
TR 1 AC. GATED SHI ICH Q
TIME CLOSING CONTACT
1.6.IS
$
CAPACITOR 2.2.1 c
11ME-UELAY SHITCHES
4.1.S INOUCTANCE 6.2.4
4.16 $ RESISTOR 2.1.4
TIME-OPENING CONTACT 4 . 1.6 % VARICAP 8.5.2
TIME-SEQUENTIAL CLOSING CONTACT 4.3.7 s VARISTOR,
TOGGLE-SWITCH, LOCKING 4 . 10 s ASYMMETRICAL 8.5.1 CR
lOGGLE-SWIICH, NONLOCKING 4.9 s SYMMETRICAL 2.1.6 RV
IOROUE AMPLIFIER 16.2.1 AR
TORQUE RECEIVER VARME TER 12. 1
13.8 VELOCITY MODULATED TUBE 15.12 V
ORuUE-01FFERENTIAL RECEIVER 11. V I BRA TOR 4.28 G
UIRUUE-DIFFERENTIAL TRANSMITTER 11.8 RE EO 4.2.2.5 MP
IOIAL TIME METER 12.1 SPLII-REED 4.2.2.6 MP
TR TUBE 15.11 V VIBRATOR, INTERRUPTOR 4.28 G
TRACK SWIICH. CLOSING 4.14.1 s VISUAL SIGNALING DEVICE 11.2 OS
TRACK SWITCH, OPENING 4.14.2 s VOL T-AMME I ER 12.1
TRANSDUCER MEASURING 2.11 HT VOLTAGE REFERENCE DIODE 8.5.6.1
IRANSOUCER,
VOLTAGE REGULATOR,
ROUE 15.S MT DIODE 8.5.6
PHOTOCONUUCTIVE .7.1 CR INDUCTION 6 . 4 . 12
PHOTOCONDUCTIVE 8.7.2 TUBE 7. 1 . 4 . I
PHOTOVOLIAIC . 7 . 1 BT VOLTAGE SENSITIVC RESISTOR 2.1.6 RV
IHtRMOMECHANICAL 2.14 HR VOLTMETER 12.1
IRANSDUC TOR 6.1 L VOLUME INOICATOR 12. 1
TRANSFER CONTACT 4.01 S WAEER SWITCH 4.13.7
TRANSFER CONTACT 4.03.01 s WATTHOUR METER 12.1
TRANSFORMER 6.04 WATTMETER 12. 1
TRANSFORMER 16.01.01.1 WAVEGUIDE 1.6
AUTO 6.4..10 CIRCULAR 3 . 6 .. I
BANK (SINGLE PHASE 1 6.4.15.1 COAXIAL 3.6.3
CURRENT 6.4.18 CONNECTDRS 5.7 J.P
ONE ADJUSTABLE WINDING 6.4.4 COUPLER, DIRECTIONAL 15. 1 DC
POLYPHASE 6.4.16 DIELECTRIC-FILLED METALLIC 1.6.2.1
POTENTIAL 6.6.20 FLEX I BLE 3.6.4
SEPARATELY AUJUSIABLE WlNUINGS 6.4.5 GAS FILLED 3.6.2.1
SYNCHRO CONTROL 11.8.2 RECTANGULAR 1.6.2
THREE WINDING 6.4.17 RCSONATOR 15.9.2
WINDING SYMBOLS 1.9 RIDGED 3.6.6
TRANSISTOR . SANDWICH LINE 3. 7 . 2
IKANSIIION R E G I O N 8.2.6 SOLID-DIELECTRIC 3.6.2.2
TRANSLATION, HOIIJN 14.2 STRIP LINE 3.7.1
TRANSMISSION LINE 1.2 TWISTED 1.6.5
IRANShl SSIC1N PATH 1. 1 W WAVEGUIDE FLANGES 5. 7
TRANSMITTER, SYNCHRO 11.8.I CHOKE 5.7. 1
TRANSMITTER, IFLEuRAPH 20.5.2 MATED 5.7.1
IKANSMITTtK, lELEPHONt CSEE MICROPHONE! PLAIN 5.7.2
TRAVELING-HAVE S T R U C T U R E . SLOW 2.6.1 OL WINDING 6.2
1 RAVEL 1NG-WAVE TUbtS 15.14 V CONNECTION 1.9
tRlG^ER OIAC 8.5.6.1 CR FIELD 11.2
IRIMWE* CAPACITOR 2.2.4 C OPERATING COIL 4.5
1IUDE 7. 1. 1 V SYMBOLS 11.1
TRIPIE-TMISTEU 3.1.7.2 W TRANSFORMER 6.4.1
IUBE, BALLAST 11.1.1 RT WIRING 3. 1
IUBE, ELECTRON 7.1 V WIRING. ALTERNATE 3. 1
I U 4 A H L E fltSONATOK 15.9. 3 L WOUND ROTOR MOTOR 11.5.2
TUNEt) CAVI TV 15.9 l WRITING HEAD 2.9.2 PU
TUNfcR WYE CONNECTION 1.9.7
E-H 15.1.5 I WYE, GROUNOEO 13.3.4
SLIOE SCREW 15.1.4 2 UNGROUNDED 13.3.3
1UNNEL DIUDE 8.5.7.1 CR X-RAY TUBE 7.3.
TUNNELING DEVICE 8.3.2 Y ADAPTER 5.6. 5
IWENTY-TWU POINT ^ELECTOR SWITCH 4.13.5 S /ENER DIODE .5.6.I
TWIN-TRIUDE 7.1. 1 V ZERO REACTANCE 15.1.2.4
tWlSTEJ PAIR 1.1.7.1 W ZIG-ZAG 1.9.9

88
Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.
Preface to CSA Standard Z99

Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams


American National Standard Y32.2-1970 in drawing certain s y m b o l s c a n , if followed,
(IEEE 315-1971), with the following modi result in i m p r o v e d d r a w i n g readability. The
f i c a t i o n s , h a s b e e n a p p r o v e d as C S A S t a n d a r d p r a c t i c e is c o n s i s t a n t w i t h C l a u s e A 4 . 3 . I t is
Z99. This action was proposed by the Com t h e r e f o r e r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t h e a v i e r l i n e s be
m i t t e e on Electrical S y m b o l s , under the juris used to show:
d i c t i o n of the S e c t i o n a l C o m m i t t e e on A b b r e 1.10 Envelopes
viations, Definitions and Symbols and was
2.2 Capacitors
formally approved by these C o m m i t t e e s .
2.5 T h e n e g a t i v e plates of batteries and
R E X D A L E , September, 1972 cells

N O T E : In order to keep abreast o f progress in the indus -4.3 T h e p a r a l l e l l i n e s in t h e ( 4 . 2 9 a n d


tries c o n c e r n e d , C S A publications arc subject to periodic 4.30) parallel contact symbols
review. Suggestions for i m p r o v e m e n t will be welcomed at
all times. T h e y will be recorded and in duo course brought 4.7 T h e m o v i n g c o n t a c t in t h e p u s h b u t
to the attention o f the appropriate C o m m i t t e e for c o n s i d
eration. ton symbol
Also, requests for interpretation will bo accepted by the
7.1 Indirectly heated cathode, anode
C o m m i t t e e . T h e y should be worded -n such a m a n n e r as
t o permit a simple " y e s " or " n o " answer based on the and combinations including these
literal text o f the requirement c o n c e r n e d .
All inquiries regarding this standard should be ad 8.5 Base symbol as used for semi
dressed to C a n a d i a n Standards Association, 178 R e x d a l e conductors
B o u l e v a r d , R e x d a l e 603, Ontario, C a n a d a .

Additionally, it is r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t the
Modifications to American l a s t s y m b o l o f 3 . 1 . 6 . 3 b e a v o i d e d i n all c a s e s .
National Standard Y 3 2 . 2 - 1 9 7 0 W h e r e s p a c e is a t a p r e m i u m , t h e p o s s i b i l i t y o f
misreading it a s a c r o s s o v e r will usually be
W h i l e n o t i l l u s t r a t e d in t h e S t a n d a r d itself, greater.
t h e widespread practice of using heavier lines T h e s e items are illustrated below:

1
J_
2.2
4- Hi-
2.5
O O
4.3 8.5
4.7

DO NOT USE

it

3.1.6.3

Authorized licensed use limited to: Univ Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas. Downloaded on February 14,2017 at 01:12:44 UTC from IEEE Xplore. Restrictions apply.

Вам также может понравиться